Yamaha Portable Grand DGX-640 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: Portable Grand DGX-640

Categorie: Synthesizer

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

DGX-640

Owner’s Manual

Keyboard Stand Assembly

For information on assembling the

keyboard stand, refer to the instructions

on page 10 of this manual.

Setting UpReferenceAppendix Quick Guide

Owner’s Manual

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter).

DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other

than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically

recommended by Yamaha.

WARNING:

Do not place this product in a position where anyone could

walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any

kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an

extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG.

NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling

capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a

cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is

used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-

pany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at

the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or

modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update

existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and

headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels

that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long

periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfort-

able. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you

should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory

mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as

optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer

assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and

any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE

using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other

uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a

function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are

not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the

owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and envi-

ronmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keep-

ing with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be

aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if

applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-

tery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary,

contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these

may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a

rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being

charged.

When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and

never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed cor-

rectly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and

battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all bat-

teries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of

household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some rea-

son its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all

local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of prod-

ucts that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable

to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model

number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this

plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the

date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual

as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-BP (bottom)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con-

tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,

6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

Owner’s Manual

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge

som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten

har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE

afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t

endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita

koko laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom

of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space

provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record

of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

(bottom)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus

may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the

terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the ter-

minal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal

of the three pin plug.

* This applies only to products distributed by

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

(2 wires)

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment

This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products

should not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with

your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC.

By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on

human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal

service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer

and ask for the correct method of disposal.

(weee_eu_en)

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park,

Calif. 90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Piano

Model Name : DGX-640

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(FCC DoC)

Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-

circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it,

or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything

over it.

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage

is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 112) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in

damage to the instrument or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument

or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any

openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power

immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the

instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch

and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device inspected

by Yamaha service personnel.

• The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

• It emits unusual smells or smoke.

• Some object has been dropped into the instrument.

• There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the

instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the

plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for

extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily

accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power

switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is

turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When

you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord

from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack,

use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal

components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components,

set all volume levels to minimum.

• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and

gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired

listening level.

• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.

If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Location

Connections

Handling caution

(7)-1 1/2

Owner’s Manual

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the [ ](Standby/On) switch is in the “Standby” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for

a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

NOTICE

To avoid the possibility of damage to the product, data or other property, follow the notices below.

 Handling and Maintenance

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day)

to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

• During extreme changes in temperature or humidity, condensation may occur and water may collect on the surface of the instrument. If water is left, the

wooden parts may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to wipe any water off immediately with a soft cloth.

–

 Saving data

• Some data items (page 64) are automatically saved as backup data in the internal memory even if you turn the power off. Saved data may be lost due to

malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device/or other external device such as a computer (pages 93–94 and 101).

• To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two USB storage devices/or other external

device such as a computer.

 About copyrights

• Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal

use.

• This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use

others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and

sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of

 About functions/data bundled with the instrument

• Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.

• This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance.

As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended.

 About this manual

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your

instrument.

• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

(7)-1 2/2

Owner’s Manual

Logos

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible

music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer.

The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation for-

mat. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in

mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of

control parameters and effects.

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and

open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file

containing lyric data is played.

STYLE FILE

The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to

provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.

Owner’s Manual

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

This manual consists of four main sections: “Setting Up,” “Quick Guide,” “Reference,” and “Appendix.”

Also, a separate “Data List” is provided.

Owner’s Manual (this book)

Data List

Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.

MIDI Reference

The MIDI Reference section contains MIDI related information. The MIDI Reference is available for

downloading from the Yamaha Manual Library at: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Included Accessories

The DGX-640 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.

•Music rest

• Accessory CD-ROM

• Owner’s manual (this book)

• Keyboard stand

• Footswitch

•AC Power Adaptor

* May not be included depending on your particular area.

Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

• Data List

• My Yamaha Product User Registration

* The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when

you fill out the User Registration form.

Setting Up

• • • • • • • • •

Please read this section first.

This section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this

section while playing the instrument.

Quick Guide

• • • • • • • • •

Reference

• • • • • • • • •

This section explains how to make detailed settings for the instru-

ment’s various functions.

Appendix

• • • • • • • • •

This section includes troubleshooting information and specifica-

tions.

Insert the music rest into

the slots as shown.

Music Rest

Owner’s Manual

Special Features

Performance assistant technology

Page 43

Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect per-

formance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do is play

on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the keyboard,

for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in time with the

music.

And if you can’t play with both hands, you can still play the melody simply by

tapping one key.

Play a Variety of Instrument Voices

Page 18

With the DGX-640, the instrument voice that sounds when you play the key-

board can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of

voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by

using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety.

Play Along with Styles

Page 24

Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles. The

accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering

wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance … and much more.

Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new

styles to expand your musical horizons.

Easy Performance with Music Notation Display

Page 32

When you play back a song, the corresponding score will be shown on the dis-

play as the song plays. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If the song

contains lyric and chord data*, the lyrics and chords will also appear on the score

display.

* No lyrics or chords will appear on the display if the song you are using with the score display

function does not contain the appropriate lyric and chord data.

Graded Hammer Standard Keyboard

Thanks to our experience as the world’s leading manufacturer of acoustic pianos, we’ve developed a key-

board with action that’s virtually indistinguishable from the real thing. Just as on a traditional acoustic

piano, the keys of the lower notes have a heavier touch, while the higher ones are more responsive to

lighter playing. The keyboard’s sensitivity can even be adjusted to match your playing style. This Graded

Hammer technology also enables the DGX-640 to provide authentic touch in a lightweight instrument.

All you need is

one finger!

Owner’s Manual

Quick GuideReferenceAppendix Setting Up

Contents

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List ........................7

Included Accessories .......................................................7

Special Features ..............................................................8

Setting Up

Setting Up 10

Keyboard Stand Assembly.............................................10

Power Requirements......................................................13

Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack).....13

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack).....................13

Connecting a Pedal Unit (PEDAL UNIT jack).................14

Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)....................15

Turning the Power On ....................................................15

Panel Controls and Terminals 16

Quick Guide

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 18

Select and Play a Voice—MAIN.....................................18

Play the Grand Piano Voice ...........................................19

Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL ......................20

Play Different Voices with the Left and Right

Hands—SPLIT ...............................................................21

The Metronome 22

Start the Metronome ......................................................22

Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ...................................22

Setting the Time Signature.............................................23

Playing Styles 24

Select a Style Rhythm ....................................................24

Play Along with a Style...................................................25

Playing Songs 28

Select and Listen to a Song ...........................................28

Select and Play Songs on a USB Flash Memory...........30

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ..............31

Play the Demo Song ......................................................31

Displaying the Song Score.............................................32

Display the Lyrics ...........................................................33

Reference

Basic Operation 34

Select a Song For a Lesson 38

The Easy Way to Play Piano 43

Play Using the Music Database 53

Change a Song’s Style 54

Record Your Own Performance 56

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 62

Backup and Initialization 64

Backup ...........................................................................64

Initialization ....................................................................64

Play with a Variety of Effects 65

Adding Harmony ............................................................65

Adding Reverb ...............................................................66

Adding Chorus ...............................................................66

Adding DSP ...................................................................67

Panel Sustain.................................................................68

Pitch Bend......................................................................68

Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound.......................69

Handy Performance Features 70

Tap Start ........................................................................70

One Touch Setting .........................................................70

Setting the Click bell sound............................................70

Adjusting the Metronome Volume..................................71

Changing the Display Language....................................71

Voice Settings 72

Voice Editing ..................................................................72

Selecting a Dual Voice ...................................................73

Selecting a Split Voice ...................................................73

Pitch Controls (Transpose) ............................................74

Pitch Controls (Tuning) ..................................................74

Touch Response Sensitivity...........................................75

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 76

Pattern Variation (Sections) ...........................................76

Changing the tempo of the Style....................................79

Adjusting the Style Volume ............................................79

Setting the Split Point.....................................................80

Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm

(Stop Accompaniment) ..................................................80

AI Fingered ....................................................................81

Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard......................81

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ............82

Song Settings 83

Changing the tempo of the Song ...................................83

Song Volume .................................................................83

A-B Repeat ....................................................................84

Muting Independent Song Tracks ..................................84

Change the Melody Voice..............................................84

BGM Playback ...............................................................85

Random Song Playback ................................................85

The Functions 86

Selecting and Setting Functions ....................................86

Saving and Loading Data 90

Connecting a USB Flash Memory..................................90

Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal

..91

Using USB Storage Devices ..........................................91

Connecting to a Computer 97

Connecting a Personal Computer..................................97

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer

..98

Transferring Data Between the Computer and

Instrument ......................................................................99

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 102

Important Notices about the CD-ROM .........................102

CD-ROM Contents.......................................................103

System Requirements..................................................104

Software Installation.....................................................104

Appendix

Troubleshooting 109

Messages 110

Specifications 112

Index 113

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Keyboard Stand Assembly

The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will be used. Follow the assembly instructions and select

the parts as needed.

CAUTION

Read these cautions carefully before you assemble or use the keyboard stand.

These cautions are to promote safe use of the stand and to prevent injury and damage from occurring to you and others. By fol-

lowing these cautions carefully, your keyboard stand will provide you with safe and prolonged use.

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the

sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.

• Use the stand after assembly is complete. An uncompleted stand may overturn or the keyboard may drop.

• Always place the stand on a flat, stable surface. Placing the stand on uneven surfaces may cause it to become unstable or over-

turn, the keyboard to drop, or injury.

• Do not use the stand for anything other than its designed purpose. Placing other objects on the stand may result in the object

dropping or the stand overturning.

• Do not apply excessive force to the keyboard as it may cause the stand to overturn or the keyboard to drop.

• Make sure the stand is sturdy and safe, and all screws have been tight and firm before use. If not, the stand may overturn, the

keyboard may drop, or may result in injury to the user.

• To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.

Have a phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.

q Joint connectors

(4 pcs.)

w 6 x 70 mm

roundhead

screws (4 pcs.)

e 6 x 30 mm

roundhead

screws (4 pcs.)

r 5 x 16 mm

roundhead

screws (4 pcs.)

Assembly Parts

Back board

Side

boards

Stand

bases

Setting Up

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

2 Attach the stand bases.

Insert the joint connectors q into the side boards as

shown. The joint connectors have been installed

properly if you can see the screw head on the con-

nector.

Attach the “L” (Left) and “R” (Right) stand bases

to the bottom of the side boards, using the screws

w. “L” (Left) and “R” (Right) are marked on the

upper surfaces of the stand bases. If you have trou-

ble fastening the screws, use a screwdriver to rotate

the joint connectors so that the connector holes are

aligned with the screw holes on the stand bases.

3 Attach the back board.

Attach the back board, using the screws e. Check

the back-to-front orientation for the side boards.

Make sure the non-colored surface is facing down.

q Joint

connectors

w 6 x 70 mm

roundhead screws

“L”

“R”

e 6 x 30 mm roundhead screws

• If you put the connectors in wrong direction and want to

take them out, tap around the holes on the boards.

• Be careful not to drop the back board or touch the

sharp metal fittings.

• If you have purchased an optional pedal unit, attach the

pedal unit before proceeding to the next step. Refer to the

instructions provided with your pedal unit.

NOTE

CAUTION

NOTE

Setting Up

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

4 Put the keyboard on the stand.

Check the back-to-front orientation for stand, and

carefully place the keyboard on the side boards.

Slowly move the keyboard so that the holes on the

bottom of the keyboard are properly aligned with

the holes on the angle brackets.

5 Install the keyboard to the stand.

Fix the keyboard to the angle brackets, using the

screws

At least

10 cm

At least

10 cm

Be sure to place your hands at

least 10 cm from either end of the

keyboard when positioning it.

r 5 x 16 mm

roundhead

screws

• Be careful not to drop the keyboard or to get your fin-

gers caught between the keyboard and the stand parts.

• Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the

position shown in the illustration.

Post-assembly checklist

Once you’ve assembled the stand, check the follow-

ing points:

• Are there any parts left over?

 If so, read the assembly instructions again and

correct any errors you might have made.

• Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable

fixtures?

 If not, move the instrument to an appropriate

location.

• Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you

play it or move it?

 If so, properly tighten all screws.

• Also, if the keyboard makes a creaking noise or

seems unsteady when you play it, refer carefully to

the assembly instructions and diagrams and

retighten all screws.

CAUTION

Setting Up

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.

Power Requirements

1 Make sure that the [ ](Standby/On) switch of the

instrument is in the “Standby” position.

2 Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack.

3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on.

Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)

Any pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4" stereo

phone plug can be plugged in here for convenient

monitoring. The speakers are automatically shut off

when a plug is inserted into this jack.

The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an

external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUT-

PUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system,

mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device

to send the instrument’s output signal to that device.

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)

The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain

as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the sup-

plied footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sus-

tain on and off.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 112). The use of other

adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the

adaptor and the instrument.

• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the

instrument, or during electrical storms.

WARNING

CAUTION

AC outlet

AC power

adaptor

• Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for

long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear

fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing.

• To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the

external devices at the minimum setting before connecting

them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in elec-

tric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the

volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradu-

ally raise the volume controls while playing the instrument

to set the desired listening level.

WARNING

CAUTION

• The sustain function does not affect split voices.

• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to

the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.

• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing

this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, result-

ing in reversed footswitch operation.

NOTE

Setting Up

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Connecting a Pedal Unit (PEDAL UNIT jack)

This jack is for connecting an optional LP-7A pedal

unit. When connecting the pedal unit, make sure to

also assemble the unit on the supplied keyboard stand.

Keyboard

Stand

LP-7A (optional)

• Make sure that power is OFF when connecting or disconnect-

ing the pedal.

NOTE

Pedal Unit Functions

The optional pedal unit has three foot pedals that produce a range of expres-

sive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano.

The pedal unit does not affect the split voice when the keyboard is in split

mode.

Damper (Right) Pedal

The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an

acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is pressed, notes sustain longer.

Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes.

A “half-pedal” effect lets you use the damper pedal to create partial sus-

tain effects, depending on how far down you press the pedal.

* When using both the Footswitch and pedal unit, the last effect applied takes

priority.

Sostenuto (Center) Pedal

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto

pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will sustain as long as you

hold the pedal (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subse-

quently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to

sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.”

Soft (Left) Pedal

The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of

notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect

notes that are already playing when it is pressed.

When you press the damper

pedal here, the notes you play

before you release the pedal

have a longer sustain.

When you press the sostenuto

pedal here while holding the

note, the note will sustain as

long as you hold the pedal.

Setting Up

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)

Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB

terminal of a computer, and you can transfer perfor-

mance data and song files between the two (page 97).

Turning the Power On

The [ ](Standby/On) switch turns the power to the

instrument on ( ) or standby ( ).

Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER

VOLUME] control to the left and press the

[ ](Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. Press

the [ ](Standby/On) switch again to turn the power

off.

Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the

instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup

data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings

are restored to the initial factory defaults when the

power is turned on.

• Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, elec-

tricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum

level. When you are not using the instrument for a long

time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from

the wall AC outlet.

• Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!”

message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the

flash memory and result in a loss of data.

CAUTION

NOTICE

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Panel Controls and Terminals

Front Panel

q [ ](Standby/On) switch...................... page 15

w [MASTER VOLUME] control ................ page 15

e [DEMO/BGM] button .................... pages 31, 85

r [SCORE] button....................................page 32

t [LYRICS] button....................................page 33

y [REC] button .........................................page 56

u LESSON START

[WAITING] button..............................page 38

[YOUR TEMPO] button .....................page 40

[MINUS ONE] button.........................page 41

i [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button ........................page 44

o [EASY SONG ARRANGER]

button ....................................................page 54

!0 Song Track

[1]–[5], [A] buttons....................pages 57, 84

Lesson

[R/1] and [L/1] buttons .....................page 38

!1 [METRONOME ON/OFF]] button .........page 22

!2 [TEMPO/TAP] button.............. pages 22, 79, 83

!3 SONG

[REPEAT&LEARN] button................page 42

[A-B REPEAT] button........................page 84

[REW] button.....................................page 31

[FF] button.........................................page 31

[PAUSE] button .................................page 31

[START/STOP] button .......................page 29

!4 STYLE

[ACMP ON/OFF] button.................... page 25

[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button ............. page 76

[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ................ page 76

[SYNC STOP] button ........................ page 78

[SYNC START] button.......................page 77

[START/STOP] button............... pages 24, 26

!5 REGIST MEMORY [BANK],

[1]–[4] buttons...................................... page 62

!6 CATEGORY [

] and [

] buttons ....... page 35

!7 [EXIT] button ........................................ page 36

!8 [FUNCTION] button...................... pages 36, 86

!9 DATA ENTRY

Dial, Number buttons [0]–[9],

[+] and [-] buttons............................. page 35

@0 [FILE CONTROL] button...................... page 90

@1 [EXECUTE] button ...............................page 92

@2 [PORTABLE GRAND] button............... page 19

@3 [SONG] button......................................page 28

@4 [STYLE] button.....................................page 24

@5 [VOICE] button ..................................... page 18

@6 [MUSIC DATABASE] button................. page 53

@7 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button ....................... page 21

@8 [DUAL ON/OFF] button........................ page 20

@9 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ...............page 65

#0 [PITCH BEND] wheel ........................... page 68

#1 Drum Kit ............................................... page 19

The illustrations next to each key indicate the drum and per-

cussion instruments assigned to the keys when “Standard Kit

1” is selected.

#2 USB TO DEVICE terminal............ pages 30, 90

ert

!1 !2

Front Panel

Song List (Data List) Style List (Data List)

Panel Controls and Terminals

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Rear Panel

#3 CONTRAST knob .................................page 37

#4 USB TO HOST terminal........................page 97

#5 SUSTAIN jack .......................................page 13

#6 PEDAL UNIT jack ................................. page 14

#7 PHONES/OUTPUT jack........................ page 13

#8 DC IN jack............................................. page 13

!7 !8

@3 @4 @5

@7 @8 @9

#6 #7 #8#5#4#3

Rear Panel

Voice List (Data List)

Music Database List (Data List)

Display (page 36)

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instru-

ment has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet,

drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide variety of musical sounds.

This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard.

Press the [VOICE] button.

The main voice selection display will appear.

The currently selected voice number and name will be highlighted.

Select the voice you want to play.

While watching the highlighted voice name rotate the dial. The avail-

able voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice

selected here becomes the main voice.

For this example select the “117 Flute” voice.

Select and Play a Voice—MAIN

The currently selected voice

number and name

• See the separate Data List

for a complete list of the

available voices.

NOTE

Select 117 Flute

Quick Guide

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

Owner’s Manual

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a variety of voices.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Preset Voice Types

When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button.

Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.

The “001 Live! Grand Piano” voice will be selected.

• Voice Settings (page 72)

NOTE

Adjusts

volume.

001–142

155–535

Instrument Voices

143–154

(Drum Kit)

Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to

individual keys, via which they can be played. Details

on assigning instruments to keys are provided in the

Drum Kit List of the separate Data List.

Play the Grand Piano Voice

• When you press the [POR-

TABLE GRAND] button all

settings other than touch

sensitivity are turned off. The

dual and split voices will

also be turned off, so only

the Grand Piano voice will

play over the entire key-

board.

NOTE

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Once you press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button to turn the dual function on, a second voice will sound

that will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. The second voice is known as

the “dual” voice. The currently selected dual voice name and number will be displayed in the MAIN

display.

Press the button a second time to turn the dual voice function off.

A suitable dual voice is automatically selected when you turn on this func-

tion, but you can easily select a different dual voice (page 73).

Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL

Dual voice number and name

Two voices will sound

at the same time.

Quick Guide

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

Owner’s Manual

Once you press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button to turn the split function on, you can play different voices

to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main and dual voices can be played to the right of

the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split point is known as the “split voice”. The cur-

rently selected split voice name and number will be displayed in the MAIN display. The split point set-

ting can be changed as required (page 80).

Press the button a second time to turn the split voice function off.

A suitable split voice is automatically selected when you turn on this func-

tion, but you can easily select a different split voice (page 73).

Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT

Split voice

Split point

Main voice and dual voice

Split voice number and name

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

The Metronome

The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play

and set the tempo that is most comfortable for you.

Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button.

To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo

setting.

Use the dial to select a tempo from 5 to 280.

Start the Metronome

Adjusting the Metronome Tempo

Indicates the beat number

in the measure

Current setting

Te mpo

Quick Guide

The Metronome

Owner’s Manual

In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature.

Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button

for longer than a second to select the function

“Time Signature–Numerator”.

Use the dial to select the number of beats per mea-

sure.

The available range is from 1 through 60. Select 5 for this example.

A bell accent will be sounded at the first beat of each measure.

Press the CATEGORY [

] and [

] buttons as

many times as necessary to select the beat length

function “Time Signature–Denominator”.

Use the dial to select the beat length.

Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quar-

ter note, eighth note, or 16th note). Select 8 for this example.

Setting the Time Signature

Hold for longer

than a second

Numerator

(Number of beats

per measure.)

Denominator

(The length of

one beat.)

• The metronome time signa-

ture will synchronize to a

style or song that is playing,

so these parameters cannot

be changed while a style or

song is playing.

NOTE

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Playing Styles

This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment

(rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your

left hand. You can select from 165 different styles covering a range of musical genres

and time signatures. In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment fea-

tures.

Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues,

Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is

played using percussion instruments only.

Press the [STYLE] button.

The style select display will appear. The currently selected style num-

ber and name will be highlighted.

Select a style.

Use the dial to select the style you want to use. A list of all the avail-

able styles is provided in the Style List of the separate Data List.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The style rhythm will start playing. Press the [START/STOP] button a

second time when you want to stop playback.

Select a Style Rhythm

The currently selected style

• You can also use the style

files provided on the sup-

plied CD-ROM (page 102).

NOTE

• The “Serenade” style in the

Waltz category and all styles

in the Pianist category have

no rhythm part and therefore

no rhythm will play if you use

them for the above example.

For these styles first turn

auto accompaniment on as

described on page 25,

press the [START/STOP]

button, and the accompani-

ment bass and chord parts

will begin playing when you

play a key to the left of the

keyboard split point.

NOTE

Quick Guide

Playing Styles

Owner’s Manual

You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page. Here we’ll see how to add bass and

chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play

along with.

Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired

style.

For this example select the “153 PianoBoogie” style.

Turn automatic accompaniment on.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Pressing this button a second time

will turn automatic accompaniment off.

Turn sync start on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on.

When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in

a style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the key-

board split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start

function off.

Play Along with a Style

When automatic accompaniment is on ...

The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54: F#2) becomes the

“auto accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the accompani-

ment chords.

This icon appears when automatic

accompaniment is on.

Auto accompaniment range

Split point (54: F#2)

Flashes when

sync start is on.

Playing Styles

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Start playing.

Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompa-

niment range of the keyboard. Try playing the chord progression

shown below. The accompaniment will change according to the left-

hand notes you play.

This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three

chords. When you get a feel for the progression in the score, try

changing the order of the chords!

Stop playing.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback when you’re

done.

• Chords (page 27)

• Looking Up Chords Using

the Chord Dictionary (page

82)

NOTE

C C

Auto accompaniment

range

Split point

Indicates the chord currently

being played in the accompani-

ment range of the keyboard.

• You can also stop playing by

pressing the [INTRO/END-

ING/rit.] button so that an

appropriate ending pattern

will play and then style play-

back will stop.

• You can switch style “sec-

tions” to add variety to the

accompaniment. Refer to

“Pattern Variation (Sec-

tions)” on page 76.

NOTE

Quick Guide

Playing Styles

Owner’s Manual

Chords

For users who are new to chords, this chart features common chords. Since there are many useful

chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for

further details.

 indicates the root note.

• A wide variety of chord types can be recognized as well as the above chord types.

• Depending on the chord type, inversions can be used as well as in “root” position.

• Some chord types may not be recognized if some notes are omitted.

Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh

Easy Chords

This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three

fingers.

For root “C”

To play a major chord

Press the root note ()

of the chord.

To play a minor chord

Press the root note

together with the nearest

black key to the left of it.

To play a seventh chord

Press the root note

together with the nearest

white key to the left of it.

To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together with

the nearest white and black keys

to the left of it (three keys alto-

gether).

AI Finger

By changing the chord fingering type to “AI Fingered”, you can automatically produce appropriate accompaniment

even if you don’t press all of the notes which comprise a chord. (pages 81 and 87)

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Playing Songs

With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a piece of music.

You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs, or use them with just about any

of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technology feature, les-

sons, and more. The songs are organized by category.

In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly describe the 30

songs provided.

Press the [SONG] button.

The song selection display will appear.

The currently selected song number and name will be highlighted.

Select a song.

Select a song after referring to the Song List in the separate Data List.

Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to.

Select and Listen to a Song

The currently selected

song number and name

• You can also play songs you

have recorded yourself

(User Songs) or songs that

have been transferred to the

instrument from a computer

in the same way that you

play the internal songs.

NOTE

The song highlighted

here can be played

Quick Guide

Playing Songs

Owner’s Manual

The songs are organized by category.

Listen to the song.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected

song.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button again.

The red lamp lights on the first beat of every measure when a song is

playing.The other beats are indicated with a green light.

• The songs in this category have been created to give you an idea of

the advanced capabilities of this instrument.

• These songs features some of the instrument’s many useful voices.

• Use these songs to experience some of the instrument’s advanced

features: song number 9 for the easy song arranger, and songs 10

and 11 for the performance assistant technology feature.

• These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as lesson songs.

• A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also well suited for use

as lesson songs.

• When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these

are the songs to do it with.

• Songs you record yourself.

• Songs stored on a USB flash memory plugged into the instrument, or

songs transferred from a computer (pages 30 and 99).

• Score data for the 30 internal

songs are provided in the

Songbook on the CD-ROM.

The exceptions are songs 1

to 11 and 30. The scores for

songs 9 to 11 are provided in

the separate Data List.

NOTE

Playing Songs

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

MIDI songs stored on a USB flash memory connected to the instrument can be directly selected and

played.

The procedure is exactly the same as that for selecting internal songs (page

28). Songs on a USB flash memory are numbered from 36 upward, so all

you need to do is select song number 36 or higher.

Select and Play Songs on a USB Flash Memory

• Precautions when using the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal

(page 91)

• In order to play data copied

to a USB flash memory from

a computer or other device,

the data must be stored

either in the USB flash mem-

ory’s root directory or a first-

level/second-level folder in

the root directory. Data

stored in third-level-folders

created inside a second-

level folder cannot be

selected and played by this

instrument.

NOTE

IMPORTANT

Song Title Display Language

File names containing Japanese characters will be properly displayed if the instru-

ment’s display language is set to “Japanese” (page 71).

USB flash memory (Root)

Song

File

Song

File

Song

File

Song

File

Can be selected/played.

Cannot be selected/played.

Quick Guide

Playing Songs

Owner’s Manual

These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF],

rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song.

Press the [DEMO/BGM] button. The demo song will start playing. Listen to some of the outstanding

instrument voices provided!

The demo song will automatically repeat from the beginning after it has played all the way through.

You can stop demo playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO/BGM] button or [START/STOP] but-

ton.

With the default setting only one demo song is played back and repeated

when the [DEMO/BGM] button is pressed. This setting can be changed so

that all internal songs are played, or all songs transferred to the instrument

from a computer are played. Five playback group settings are provided. Sim-

ply select the one that suits your needs. (page 85)

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause

REW

Press the fast reverse

button to rapidly

return to an earlier

point in the song.

Press the fast forward

button to rapidly skip

ahead to a later point

in the song.

PAUSE

Press the pause button

to pause playback.

When lit the functions indi-

cated by the labels above

the buttons can be used.

Play the Demo Song

Playing Songs

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

This instrument is capable of display the scores of songs.

Scores are displayed for the 30 internal preset songs as well as songs in SMF format stored in a USB

flash memory or the instrument’s internal flash memory.

Select a song.

Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 28.

Press the [SCORE] button and a single-staff score

will appear.

There are two types of score display: single-staff and double-staff.

These are alternately selected each time the [SCORE] button is

pressed.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The song will begin playing. The triangular will move across the top

of the score to indicate the current location.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN dis-

play.

Displaying the Song Score

• Both chords and lyrics will

be shown in single-staff

score display of a song that

includes chord and lyric

data.

• When there are many lyrics

they may be displayed in

two rows a measure.

• Some lyrics or chords may

be abbreviated if the

selected song has a lot of

lyrics.

• Small notes that are hard to

read may be easier to read

after you use the quantize

function (page 88).

• No chords or lyrics are

shown on the double-staff.

• If the song volume is turned

all the way down at this point

you will be able to hear only

the sound of your own per-

formance so that you can

play the song yourself while

reading the score. Refer to

page 83 for the song volume

adjustment procedure.

NOTE

Single-staff

Double-staff

Marker

Melody score

Chord

Lyrics

Quick Guide

Playing Songs

Owner’s Manual

If a song contains lyric data, the lyrics can be made to appear on the display.

No lyrics will be displayed for a song that contains no lyric data even if the [LYRICS] button is

pressed.

Select a song.

Select a song 16 by performing steps 1 and 2 described on page 28.

Internal song number 16 is the only internal song that provides lyric

display.

Press the [LYRICS] button.

The title, lyricist, and composer of the song will appear on the dis-

play.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The song will play back while the lyrics and chords are shown on the

display.

The lyrics will be highlighted to show the current location in the

song.

Display the Lyrics

• Songs downloaded from the

Internet or commercially

available song files, includ-

ing XF format files (page 6),

are compatible with the lyr-

ics display features as long

as they are standard MIDI

file format files containing

lyric data. Lyrics display may

not be possible with some

files.

• If the lyrics display shows

garbled characters, try

changing the display lan-

guage (page 71).

NOTE

Song title, lyricist,

and composer.

Lyrics and chord

display

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Basic Operation

Overall DGX-640 control is based on the following simple operations.

1 Press a button to select a basic function.

2 Use the dial to select an item or value.

3 Start a function.

Volume Adjustment

Adjusts the volume of the sound

heard via the instrument’s speak-

ers or a pair of headphones plugged

into the PHONES jack.

Rotate coun-

terclockwise

to lower the

volume.

Rotate

clockwise to

increase the

volume.

Display (pages 36–37)

3 Start a function. 1 Select a basic function. 2 Select an item or value.

Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson.

Select an auto-accompaniment style.

Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard.

Reference

Basic Operation

Owner’s Manual

Reference

2 Use the dial to select an item or value.

When you select a basic function, the item

corresponding to that function will be

listed in the display. You can then use the

dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select

the desired item.

Changing Values

Rotate the dial clockwise to

increase the value of the

selected item, or counterclock-

wise to decrease it’s value.

Rotate the dial continuously to

continuously increase or

decrease the value.

Press the [+] button

briefly to increment the

value by 1, or press the [-]

button briefly to decre-

ment the value by 1. Press

and hold either button to

continuously increment or

decrement the value in the

corresponding direction.

The number buttons can be used to directly enter a

song number or parameter value.

Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted

(see below).

When selecting a song, style,

or voice, you can use these

buttons to jump to the first

item in the next or previous

category.

The CATEGORY [

] and

[

] buttons are useful for

selecting categorized items,

as in the example below.

Example: VOICE SELECT Display

In a display in which a category appears, selection is

easy if you first use the CATEGORY [

] and [

]

buttons to select the category containing the desired

item, then use the dial or [+] and [-] buttons to select

the item. This can be particularly handy when you

have to select from a large number of voices.

3 Start a function.

This is the [START/STOP] button.

Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start

playback of the selected song or style (rhythm).

The currently selected item

is highlighted in the display.

In this example the [VOICE]

button has been pressed.

Dial

[+] and [-] Buttons

Number Buttons [0]–[9]

IncreaseDecrease

Press briefly

to increment.

Press briefly

to decrement.

Example: Song number

“003” can be entered in

three ways.

•[0]  [0]  [3]

•[0]  [3]

(“003” will appear on the

display after a brief delay)

•[3]

(“003” will appear on the

display after a brief delay)

Press number buttons [0], [0], [3].

CATEGORY [

] and [

] buttons

In most procedures described throughout this

owner’s manual the dial is recommended for selec-

tion simply because it is the easiest and most intui-

tive selection method. Please note however, that

most items or values that can be selected using the

dial can also be selected using the [+] and [-] but-

tons.

Jump to the first item

in the next or previ-

ous category.

CATEGORY button [

] mark.

The first voice in the

selected category is

selected.

CATEGORY button

[

] mark.

Select the category

shown here.

Basic Operation

Owner’s Manual

Reference

The Displays

Display Names

All operations are carried out while watching the display. A number of display types are provided for different

modes and functions. The name of the current display appears at the top of the display.

MAIN Display

FUNCTION Display

The FUNCTION display provides access to 53 utility functions (page 86).

The FUNCTION display appears when the [FUNCTION] button is pressed. In the FUNCTION display you can

use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] buttons to select 53 different groups of functions. Press the CATEGORY but-

ton(s) as many times as necessary until the required function appears. You can then use the dial, the [+] and [-]

buttons, or the number [0]–[9] buttons to adjust the value of the function as required.

To Return To the MAIN Display

Most basic operations are carried out from the instrument’s MAIN display.

You can return to the MAIN display from any other display by pressing the [EXIT] but-

ton near the lower right corner of the display panel.

The “Press & Hold” Symbol

The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that the button can be

pressed and held for longer than a second to call up a related function. This provides

convenient direct access to a range of functions.

Title

Function item

Value

Basic Operation

Owner’s Manual

Reference

MAIN Display Items

The MAIN display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice.

It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions.

* Adjust the LCD CONTRAST control

on the rear panel of the instrument

for optimum display legibility.

Style (Auto-accompaniment)

Status

Appears when auto accom-

paniment is on.

Appears when the synchro-

stop function is engaged.

The style pattern name.

Registration Memory Status

Shows the selected

bank number.

Shows the memory numbers

that contain data. A border

appears around the selected

number.

Function ON/Off Icons

Performance assistant technology

Appears when the performance

assistant technology is on.

Harmony

Appears when Harmony is on.

When this icon is showing harmony

notes will be added to the main

voice.

DSP

Appears when DSP is on.

Song Track Status

Highlighted during user song

recording.

A border is off when track is muted.

Transpose

Chord

Display

Tempo

A-B Repeat

Appears when repeat

playback is engaged.

Measure Number

Voice: Main (page 18)

Dual (page 20)

Split (page 21)

Song (page 28)

Style (page 24)

MDB (page 53)

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Select a Song For a Lesson

Yamaha Education Suite

You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands les-

son. During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play wrong

notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle. It’s never too late to

start learning!

The practice methods:

Lesson 1—Waiting

In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you play

the right note.

Select a song for your lesson.

Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category! For this example

try selecting the “012 For Elise”.

Press [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Turn off playback of the part you wish to practice.

The preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts. You can turn the left-

and right-hand parts on or off as required in order to practice the corresponding

part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played

by the [R/1] button and the left-hand part is played by the [L/2] button.

Pressing the part buttons [R/1] and [L/2] toggles part playback on and off. Turn

off playback of the part you wish to practice. When you first select a song, both

“1” and “2” indicators with borders light up, indicating that both parts are on.

When you press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the border around the

corresponding part indicator disappears and the corresponding part playback is

muted.

Lesson 1—Waiting  Learn to play the correct notes.

Lesson 2—Your Tempo   Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing.

Lesson 3—Minus One    Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song.

• Song numbers 10 and 11 are

function demos for perfor-

mance assistant. The les-

son function cannot be used

with them.

• You can also use songs

(only SMF format 0) trans-

ferred from the computer

and saved to flash memory.

(page 100)

• You can also use songs

(only SMF format 0) on a

USB flash memory. (page

30)

• You can turn parts on or off,

even during playback.

NOTE

Right-hand

lesson

(R part is off)

Left-hand

lesson

(L part is off)

Both-hands

lesson

(R and L parts are off)

Select a Song For a Lesson

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Start Lesson 1.

Press the [Waiting] button to start Lesson 1.

Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1.

Play the notes shown in the on-screen score. The next note to be played is indi-

cated by a dot (

) on the appropriate key of the graphic on-screen keyboard.

When you play the correct note the marker will move to the next key to be

played. Playback will pause and wait for you to play the correct note. The trian-

gular marker (

) above the score indicates playback progress.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-

ton.

Shifting the keyboard left or right.

The hidden ( ) areas of the keyboard can be brought into view by pressing

the [+] or [-] button

61 keys of the keyboard’s range are shown on the display. The DGX-640 actu-

ally have 88 keys. In some songs that include very high or low notes, those notes

may fall outside the displayed range and may not be shown on the display. In

such cases an “over” indicator appear to the left or right of the graphic keyboard.

Use the [+] or [-] button to shift the keyboard left or right so you can see the

notes (the  marker will appear on the appropriate key in the display). Notes

that actually fall outside the keyboard’s range cannot be used in the lesson.

 Marker

 Marker

The displayed range (61 keys)

Actual keyboard range (DGX-640 = 88 keys)

Select a Song For a Lesson

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Lesson 2—Your Tempo

Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are

playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace.

Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 3 on

page 38).

Start Lesson 2.

Press the [YOUR TEMPO] button to start Lesson 2.

Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected.

The triangular marker will appear in the score display, and will move to indicate

the current note in the song. Try to play the notes at the correct timing. As you

learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo will increase until

eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original tempo.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-

ton.

Play while following

the score marker

Select a Song For a Lesson

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Lesson 3—Minus One

Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have

chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song.

Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 3 on

page 38).

Start Lesson 3.

Press the [Minus One] button to start Lesson 3.

Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected.

Play along while listening to the song. The score marker and keyboard marker

in the display will indicate the notes to play.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-

ton.

 Marker

 Marker

Select a Song For a Lesson

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn

Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to repeat-

edly practice a section you find difficult.

Press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button during a lesson. The song location will move

back four measures from the point at which you pressed the button, and playback

will begin after a one-measure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at

which you pressed the [REPEAT & LEARN] button, and then jump back four mea-

sures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all you have to do

is press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button when you make a mistake in order to

repeat practice of that section until you get it right. Press the button again to return to

the normal lesson mode.

• The evaluation feature can

be turned off via the FUNC-

TION Grade item (page 88).

NOTE

See How You’ve Done

When the lesson song has played all the way through your performance will be

evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the

highest evaluation.

After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the

beginning.

• You can change the number

of measures the Repeat and

learn function jumps back

by pressing a number button

[1]–[9] during repeat play-

back.

NOTE

Owner’s Manual

Reference

The Easy Way to Play Piano

This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature that lets you play

along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even though you might be making

lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any notes and still sound good! You could even

just tap one key and the results would be a beautiful melody. So even if you can’t play

piano and can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun.

Performance assistant technology offers four selectable types. Select the type that pro-

duces the best results for you.

 Chord...........................No matter where or what you play, the result will be musical, well-balanced

sound. This type offers the greatest freedom, allowing you to play anything

with both your left and right hands.

 Chord/Free .................If you can play simple right-hand melodies but have trouble with left-hand

chords, this is the type for you. The Chord type applies to only the left-hand

section of the keyboard, allowing you to easily play chords to support the

melody you are playing with your right hand.

 Melody.........................This type lets you play the melody of the selected song by playing any keys

with just one finger. Start playing melodies right away, even if you’ve never

played a keyboard instrument before!

 Chord/Melody............Play the melody of the selected song with one finger on the right-hand sec-

tion of the keyboard, and play chords on the left-hand section of the key-

board using the Chord type.

To use the performance assistant technology feature it is necessary to play a song that includes the required chord

and/or melody data. When the Chord and Chord/Free type is selected the performance assistant technology can

only be used with songs that include chord data. When the Melody type is selected the performance assistant tech-

nology will only work with songs that include melody data. When the Chord/Melody type is selected the perfor-

mance assistant technology can only be used with songs that include chord and melody data. In order to find out if

a song includes the required chord data, refer to the Song List in the separate Data List document.

Refer to page 52 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual

Reference

CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands

Try out the performance assistant technology using the preset song “Ave Maria.”

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.

This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.

The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the perfor-

mance assistant technology feature is on.

Select the CHORD type.

Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the

performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord type by using

the dial.

Select a song.

For this example try selecting the “010 Ave Maria”.

When the Chord type is selected, features only available for this song can be

seen in the display!

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

The basic pattern will play repeatedly. Listen to the basic pattern for four mea-

sures while getting a feel for the basic pattern, then begin playing yourself from

the fifth measure. The keys you should play will be shown in the display.

The currently

selected type

Select Chord

Hold for longer

than a second

• Select and Listen to a Song

(page 28)

NOTE

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Play on the keyboard.

Try playing the score on the left with both hands. You can even play the same

keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. You’ll notice that at measure five the

notes will come out according to the score on the right. Keep playing, and per-

formance assistant technology Chord type will continue to “correct” the notes

that you play.

This is the performance assistant technology Chord type.

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assis-

tant technology feature off.

“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type

is normally shown.

Next try playing a different preset song.

AfterBefore

• The score for Ave Maria is

provided in the separate

Data List.

NOTE

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual

Reference

CHORD/FREE Type—Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only

Try out the performance assistant technology using the preset song “Nocturne.”

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.

This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.

The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the perfor-

mance assistant technology feature is on.

Select the CHORD/FREE type.

Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the

performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord/Free type by

using the dial.

Select a song.

For this example try selecting the “011 Nocturne”.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

The left-hand keys you should play will be shown on the display.

The currently

selected type

Select Chord/Free

Hold for longer

than a second

• Select and Listen to a Song

(page 28)

NOTE

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Play on the keyboard.

Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of the split

point with your left hand.

Play the Nocturne melody with your right hand. Continually play an F-A-C

arpeggio with your left hand as indicated by the score shown in the display.

Although you’re repeatedly playing the same notes with your left hand, the

actual notes produced will change to match the music.

This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Free type.

Press the [SCORE] button if you want to see the score for the right-hand part in

the display.

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assis-

tant technology feature off.

“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type

is normally shown.

Next try playing a different preset song.

Split point

With this type notes played on the

left-hand side of the split point will

actually sound an octave higher.

• The score for Nocturne is

provided in the separate

Data List.

NOTE

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual

Reference

MELODY Type—Play with One Finger

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.

This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.

The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the perfor-

mance assistant technology feature is on.

Select the MELODY type.

Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the

performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Melody type by using

the dial.

Select a song.

For this example try selecting the “012 For Elise”.

Display the score.

Press the [SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

Because the Melody type has been selected, the song melody will not sound.

You can enjoy playing the melody yourself.

The currently

selected type

Select Melody

Hold for longer

than a second

• Select and Listen to a Song

(page 28)

NOTE

• Displaying the Song Score

(page 32)

NOTE

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Play on the keyboard.

The marker will indicate the current position in the score during playback.

If you play a key each time the marker appears above a note in the score

you will be able to play the melody with the correct “original” rhythm.

How does it sound? You’ve played the melody using only one finger thanks to

the performance assistant technology Melody type!

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assis-

tant technology feature off.

“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type

is normally shown.

Next try playing a different preset song.

 Marker

Sounds like

a melody!

Appears when the performance

assistant technology is on

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual

Reference

CHORD/MELODY—Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.

This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.

The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the perfor-

mance assistant technology feature is on.

Select the CHORD/MELODY type.

Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the

performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord/Melody type

by using the dial.

Select a song.

For this example try selecting the “023 Rock Piano”.

Display the score.

Press the [SCORE] button twice to call up the double-staff score in the display.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

Because the Melody type has been selected, the song melody will not sound.

You can enjoy playing the melody yourself.

The currently

selected type

Select Chord/Melody

Hold for longer

than a second

• Select and Listen to a Song

(page 28)

NOTE

• Displaying the Song Score

(page 32)

NOTE

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Play on the keyboard.

Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of the split

point with your left hand.

Play along with the rhythm of the song melody with your right hand. You can

play any keys as long as you’re playing to the right of the split point. At the

same time play accompaniment-like chords and phrases with your left hand. No

matter what you play, you’ll produce the song melody with your right hand and

beautiful chords and phrases with your left hand.

This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Melody type.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assis-

tant technology feature off.

“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type

is normally shown.

Next try playing a different preset song.

Split point

With this type notes played on the

left-hand side of the split point will

actually sound an octave higher.

 Marker

Appears when the performance

assistant technology is on

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro!

Here are a few hints for using the Chord type.

If you select Chord/Free or Chord/Melody, the left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the Chord type sec-

tion, so use these hints on the left-hand section of the keyboard.

To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands spread as shown in the illustration, simply

play the keyboard alternately with your left and right hands (any notes will do).

How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you play thanks to the performance assis-

tant technology Chord type!

Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of playing produce different results.

Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a melody with your right ... or any other

combination.

Sounds like

you’re playing

the right notes!

The chord information included

in the song is displayed in the

lower area of the MAIN display.

You will get even better results if

you match your left-hand rhythm

to rhythm of the chord indicator

in the display.

Play with the left and right hands

at the same timing—type 1.

Play 3 notes at once

with your right hand.

Play with the left and right hands

at the same timing—type 2.

Play 1 note at a time with your right

hand (for example: index finger 

middle finger  ring finger).

Play alternately with the left

and right hands—type 3.

Play 3 notes at once

with your right hand.

External Songs and the performance assistant technology

Songs downloaded from the Internet can also be used with the performance assistant technology as long as

they include the required chord and/or melody data.

Chord data

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Play Using the Music Database

You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best

voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate

style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for

the ideal combination of sounds and style!

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

A Music Database list will appear in the display.

Select a Music Database.

Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List in the separate Data

List, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that matches the image

of the song you intend to play.

Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right.

The style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the

split point. Refer to pages 26–27 for information about playing chords.

If you press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display at this point you

can check the assigned voice and style.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

• Music Database (MDB) files

transferred from a computer

or stored on a USB flash

memory device connected

to the instrument can be

selected and used in the

same way as the internal

Music Databases (MDB

numbers 306–). File transfer

instructions are provided on

page 100.

NOTE

Split Point

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Change a Song’s Style

In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to play the song

with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you can play a song that is nor-

mally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create

totally different arrangements by changing the style with which a song is played.

You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for a complete

change of image.

Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger

The “Hallelujah Chorus” in the preset songs lets you experience the Easy Song Arranger. Playing it.

Press the [SONG] button and use the dial to select “009 Hallelujah Chorus.” Press

the [START/STOP] button begin playback of the song. An explanation of the Easy

Song Arranger feature will appear on the display. As the song progresses the styles

will change, changing the overall image of the song.

Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other songs as

well—any songs that include chord data.

Using the Easy Song Arranger

Try switching styles while the song plays back.

Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button from the MAIN dis-

play.

The EASY SONG ARRANGER MAIN display will appear. The currently

selected song name and number will be highlighted.

Select a Song.

Press the [SONG] button and then rotate the dial to select the song you want to

arrange. Select the songs that include the required chord data referring to the

Song List in the separate Data List.

Listen to the song.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move on to the

next step while the song is playing.

• The score for Hallelujah

Chorus is provided in the

separate Data List.

NOTE

The currently selected song

number and name are dis-

played here.

• When playing song numbers

010 and 021 to 030 while

using the Easy Song

Arranger, melody tracks will

be automatically muted and

no melody will sound. In

order to hear the melody

tracks you will need to press

the SONG MEMORY but-

tons [3] to [5].

NOTE

Change a Song’s Style

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Select a style.

Press the [STYLE] button and then rotate the dial to hear how the song sounds

with different styles. As you select different styles the song will remain the same

while only the styles change.

Changing a song melody voice.

If you press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second a voice list

will appear. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be selected alternately

each time you press the [VOICE] button.

Use the dial to change the melody voice. As you select different melody voices

the song will remain the same while only the melody voice changes.

Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button to turn the function

off.

If the song or style is being played back, first stop the playback, then turn the

Easy Song Arranger function off.

• Because the Easy Song

Arranger uses song data you

can’t specify chords by play-

ing in the accompaniment

range of the keyboard. The

[ACMP ON/ OFF] button will

not function.

• If the time signature of the

song and style are different,

the time signature of the song

will be used.

NOTE

The Melody R and Melody L displays

will be selected alternately each time

you press the [VOICE] button.

The currently selected melody

voice will be displayed.

Hold for longer

than a second

• If you press the [INTRO/END-

ING/rit.] button during style

playback, the style will stop

but the song will continue

playing. Use the [START/

STOP] button to stop play-

back completely.

NOTE

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Record Your Own Performance

You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as user songs 031

through 035. Once your performances have been saved as user songs they can be

played in the same way as the internal songs. User songs can also be saved to a USB

flash memory device, as described on page 94.

Recording

Press the [REC] button.

You can turn off the Record mode by pressing the [REC] button again or [EXIT]

button (The [START/STOP] button indicator stop flashing).

Start recording.

When you play the keyboard, recording will begin.

Stop recording.

Press the [REC] button or [START/STOP] button to stop the recording.

Save the song.

When recording is stopped a message asking if you want to save the song will

appear. Press the [+/YES] button to save the song, or the [-/NO] button if you

don’t want to save the song. If saved, the song will be stored as a MIDI file in

song number 031–035.

To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button.

• If all User Songs (Song

numbers 031–035) contain

recorded data, Song 031

will automatically be

selected. In this case, you

will record over and erase

any previous data in Song

031, so be careful that you

won’t be erasing any mate-

rial you want to keep!

• Accompaniment cannot be

turned on or off once the

[REC] button is pressed.

NOTICE

NOTE

The lowest-numbered unrecorded User

Song (Song numbers 031–035) avail-

able for recording is displayed. If you

want to select the Song you will be

recording, select the desired Song

number by using the dial.

Track 1 is

automatically

selected

Flashes when

record mode is on.

• After you’ve selected the

desired User Song for

recording, you can select a

Style to be recorded as well.

To do this, press the [STYLE]

button and select the Style

number while the ACMP

indication is on.

NOTE

• Never attempt to turn the

power off when a “Writ-

ing!” message is shown in

the display. Doing so can

damage the flash memory

and result in a loss of data.

NOTICE

Record Your Own Performance

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Recording to a specified track

From the MAIN display press the [SONG] button, then use the

dial to select the user song number (031–035) you want to

record to.

Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your selec-

tion on the display.

 Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track Together

Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the

[REC] button.

Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button.

The selected tracks will be highlighted in the display.

• Up to approximately 30,000

notes can be recorded for

the five user songs if you

record only to the melody

tracks.

• User songs are saved as

SMF (Standard MIDI File)

format 0 files. Refer to page

108 for information on SMF

files.

NOTE

Recordable Data

You can record up to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord)

track. Each track can be recorded individually.



SONG MEMORY (Track) [1]–[5]

..Record the melody parts.



SONG MEMORY (Track) [A]

........Records the style pattern and chord parts.

Track Mute

This instrument allows you to choose whether recorded tracks will play back

while you are recording or playing back other tracks (page 84).

Melody Chords

Specify track(s)

and record

Track

Style

Track

Rotate the dial to select a song

number between 031 and 035.

• If you record to track that

contains previously-

recorded data the previ-

ous data will be overwritten

and lost.

• Style accompaniment is

automatically turned on

when you select the style

track [A] for recording.

• Style accompaniment can-

not turned on or off while

recording is in progress.

NOTICE

NOTE

Track 1 and Style track

will be highlighted

Press and

hold

Record Your Own Performance

Owner’s Manual

Reference

 Record a Melody track

Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the

[REC] button. Select button [1]–[3] if you want to record a dual voice. Split

voices cannot be recorded.

The selected track will be highlighted in the display.

To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a second time.

Recording will start when you play on the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

The current measure will be shown on the display during recording.

Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC] button.

When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001 and the

recorded track numbers in the display will be shown in a box border.

• If style accompaniment is on

and track [A] has not yet

been recorded, the style

track [A] will automatically

be selected for recording

when a melody track is

selected. If you only want to

record a melody track, be

sure to turn the style track

[A] off.

NOTE

Track 1 will be

highlighted

• If the memory becomes full

during recording a warning

message will appear and

recording will stop automati-

cally. Use the song clear or

track clear (pages 60–61)

function to delete unwanted

data and make more room

available for recording, then

do the recording again.

• If you want to record only the

rhythm (percussion) part,

press the [START/STOP]

button to play just the

rhythm, then add the section

change by pressing the

[INTO/ENDING/rit.] button or

[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

• If you press the [INTRO/

ENDING/rit.] button while

recording a style track, an

appropriate ending pattern

will play and then recording

will stop.

NOTE

Current measure

Recording

starts

Record Your Own Performance

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Save the song.

When recording is stopped a message asking if you want to save the song will

appear. Press the [+/YES] button to save the song, or the [-/NO] button if you

don’t want to save the song. If saved, the song will be stored as a MIDI file in

song number 031–035.

If you press the [-/NO] button in response to the confirmation message the song

will not be saved as a MIDI file but will remain in the instrument’s memory

until the power is turned off, so you have the option of converting the song to a

MIDI file and saving it later. To do this press and hold the [REC] button until the

save confirmation message appears, then press the [+/YES] button.

When the recording is done ...

To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button.

 To Play Back a User Song

User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 28).

 To save a User Song to USB flash memory  page 94.

• The recorded Song data

will be lost if you turn the

power to the instrument off

without executing the Save

operation.

NOTICE

To Record Other Tracks

Repeat steps 2 through 5 to record any of the remaining tracks.

By selecting an unrecorded track—track buttons [1]–[5], [A]—you can

record the new track while listening to previously recorded tracks (the bor-

der around the track number will appear in the display). You can also mute

previously recorded tracks (the border around the track number disappears

in the display) while recording new tracks.

To Re-record a Track

Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal

way.

The new material will overwrite the previous data.

Data that cannot be recorded

• Split voice

• The following items are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes

made during the song will not be recorded.

Time signature, Style number, Style volume

Record Your Own Performance

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Song Clear—Deleting User Songs

This function clears an entire user song (all tracks).

From the MAIN display select the user song (031–035) you want

to clear.

Press and hold the track [1] button for longer than a second

while holding the track [A] button.

A confirmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [+] button to clear the song.

The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the song

is being cleared.

• If you only want to clear a

specific track from a user

song use the Track Clear

function.

NOTE

Press and

hold

Hold for longer

than a second

Record Your Own Performance

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song

This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song.

From the MAIN display select the user song (031–035) you want

to clear.

Press and hold the track button ([1]–[5], [A]) corresponding to

the track you want to clear for longer than a second.

A confirmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [+] button to clear the track.

The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the track

is being cleared.

Hold for longer

than a second

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite set-

tings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 32 complete setups can be saved

(8 banks of four setups each).

Saving to the Registration Memory

Set the panel controls as required—select a voice, accompani-

ment style, etc.

Press the [BANK] button. A bank number will appear in the dis-

play when you release the button.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select a bank num-

ber from 1 to 8.

Press one of the REGIST MEMORY buttons [1] to [4] while hold-

ing the [BANK] button to store the current panel settings to the

specified registration memory.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display in order to check the

bank and registration memory numbers.

Up to 32 presets (eight

banks of four each)

can be memorized.

Memory 1 Memory 2

8 Banks

Memory 3 Memory 4

Bank number

• Data cannot be saved to the

registration memory during

song playback.

NOTE

• You can also save your

panel settings memorized to

registration memory button

into USB flash memory as

the user file or to a computer

as the backup file.

• If you select a Registration

Memory number that

already contains data, the

previous data is deleted and

overwritten by the new data.

• Do not turn off the power

while saving settings to the

registration memory, other-

wise the data may be dam-

aged or lost.

NOTE

NOTICE

Bank number

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Recalling a Registration Memory

Press the [BANK] button. A bank number will appear in the dis-

play when you release the button.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select bank you

want to recall.

You can check whether the panel settings are stored in registration memory 1–4

by pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Press one of the REGIST MEMORY buttons [1] to [4] containing

the settings you want to recall. The panel controls will be

instantly set accordingly.

Bank number

Settings That Can be Saved to the Registration Memory

Style settings*

Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF, Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo, Chord Fingering

Voice settings

Main Voice setting

(Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level),

Dual Voice settings

(Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level),

Split Voice settings

(Split ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level)

Effect settings

Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain ON/OFF, DSP ON/OFF, DSP Type

Harmony settings

Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume

Other settings

Transpose, Pitch Bend Range

* Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song features.

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Backup and Initialization

Backup

The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to

initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation “Backup Clear” as explained below.

Initialization

This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The

following initialization procedures are provided.

Backup Clear

To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user setting, registra-

tion memory—turn the power on by pressing the [ ] (Standby/On) switch while

holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased

and the default values restored.

Initialization does not delete the files transferred from the computer. If you

want to delete the files, see “Deleting Files” below.

Deleting Files

To clear Song, Style, and Music Database files that have been transferred to the

internal flash memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [ ]

(Standby/On) switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the key-

board and the three highest black keys.

• You can save the settings as

backup data to your com-

puter, by using the Musicsoft

Downloader (MSD) soft-

ware. Refer to the section

“Transfer a backup file from

the instrument to a com-

puter” on page 101.

NOTE

The Backup Parameters

• Registration Memory

• FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume,

Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Can-

cel, Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Language Selec-

tion, Panel Sustain, Master EQ type, Chord Fingering

• When you execute the

Flash Clear operation, data

you have purchased will

also be cleared. Be sure to

save data you want to keep

to a computer.

NOTICE

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Play with a Variety of Effects

Adding Harmony

This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice.

Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button

to turn Harmony feature on.

To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY

ON/OFF] button again.

Press and hold the [HARMONY] button

for longer than a second.

The currently selected harmony type will be dis-

played.

Use the dial to select a harmony type.

Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data

List for information about the available harmony

types. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony

function. The effect and operation of each Har-

mony Type is different-refer to the below section

“How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as the

Effect Type List for details.

You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function

Settings (page 88).

• When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn

this feature on, the appropriate harmony type for the cur-

rently selected main voice is automatically selected.

When harmony is on the harmony

icon will appear in the display.

NOTE

The currently selected

harmony type

Hold for longer

than a second.

• The harmony notes can be added only to the Main

Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices.

• The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce

no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on

(ACMP ON is lit).

NOTE

How to sound each Harmony Type

• Harmony type 01 to 10, 13

Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in

the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard

when the Auto Accompaniment is on.

• Harmony type 15 to 18 (Echo)

Keep holding down the keys.

• Harmony type 19 to 22 (Tremolo)

Keep holding down the keys.

• Harmony type 23 to 26 (Trill)

Hold down two keys.

Play with a Variety of Effects

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Adding Reverb

Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type

ambience. When you select a style or song the opti-

mum reverb type for the voice used is automatically

selected. If you want to select a different reverb type,

use the procedure described below. Refer to the Effect

Type List in the separate Data List for information

about the available reverb types.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up

the FUNCTION display.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the Reverb Type item.

The currently selected reverb type will be dis-

played.

Use the dial to select a reverb type.

You can check how the selected reverb type

sounds by playing on the keyboard.

Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data

List for information about the available reverb

types.

Adding Chorus

The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar

to many of the same voices being played in unison.

When you select a style or song the optimum chorus

type for the voice used is automatically selected. If

you want to select a different chorus type, use the pro-

cedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up

the FUNCTION display.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the Chorus Type item.

The currently selected chorus type will be dis-

played.

Use the dial to select a chorus type.

You can check how the selected chorus type

sounds by playing on the keyboard.

Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data

List for information about the available chorus

types.

Adjusting the Reverb Level

You can individually adjust the amount of

reverb that is applied to the main, dual, and

split voices. (See page 87).

Reverb Type item

The currently selected

reverb type.

Adjusting the Chorus Level

You can individually adjust the amount of cho-

rus that is applied to the main, dual, and split

voices. (See page 87).

Chorus Type item

The currently selected

chorus type.

Play with a Variety of Effects

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Adding DSP

DSP is term of abbreviated form of Digital Signal Processor. The DSP effect can be added to the Main and Dual

Voices. These range from reverb-like ambience effects to distortion and other dynamic processing tools that let

you enhance the sound, or completely transform it.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up

the FUNCTION display.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] buttons

to select the DSP ON/OFF item.

The current setting is displayed.

Use the dial to turn DSP on or off.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display in order to check the DSP on/off status.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the DSP Type item.

The currently selected DSP type will be displayed.

Use the dial to select a DSP type.

Refer to the DSP Type List in the separate Data

List for information about the available DSP

types.

• When DSP is turned on, the optimum DSP type for the

current Voice is automatically selected.

• The volume of the currently playing Voice changes when

turning DSP on or off. This is not a malfunction. The

amount of change differs depending on the selected

Voice.

• The DSP type is an overall setting–only one type can be

selected. For this reason, when you play a newly loaded

Song or Style, for example, the currently playing Voices

may not sound as expected. This is normal, since the

Song or Style has its own DSP type which replaces any

selection you’ve made before loading. A similar phe-

nomenon occurs when you use the [FF], [REW] buttons

or A-B Repeat function during song playback.

NOTE

Adjusting the DSP Level

You can individually adjust the amount of DSP

that is applied to the main and dual voices.

(See page 87).

When DSP is on the DSP icon

will appear in the display

Play with a Variety of Effects

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Panel Sustain

This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use

it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all

times, regardless of footswitch operation. The sustain

function does not affect split voice.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up

the FUNCTION display.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the Sustain item.

The current setting is displayed.

Use the dial to turn panel sustain on or

off.

Pitch Bend

The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch

variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the

wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower

the pitch.

You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by

the wheel, as described on

page 87.

• The sustain of some voices may not be markedly

affected when the panel sustain function is turned on.

NOTE

Play with a Variety of Effects

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound

Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listening

through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker

system.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in the

display.

Press the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the master EQ type function

“Master EQ Type”.

The currently selected EQ type will appear.

Use the dial to select the desired Master

EQ setting.

Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and 2

are best for listening via the instrument’s built-in

speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings

4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speak-

ers.

The currently selected

master EQ type.

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Handy Performance Features

Tap Sta r t

You can start the song/style by simply tapping the

[TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times

for time signatures in 4, and three times for time sig-

natures in 3. You can change the tempo during song/

style playback by pressing the button just twice.

One Touch Setting

Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a

song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Set-

ting feature automatically selects a well-balanced

voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply

select voice number “000” to activate this feature.

Setting the Click bell sound

This allows you to select whether the click sound has

a bell accent, or plays only a click sound.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the Bell item.

You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons

to turn the bell sound on or off.

Handy Performance Features

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Adjusting the Metronome Volume

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the Metronome Volume

item.

Use the dial to set the metronome vol-

ume as required.

Changing the Display Language

This instrument allows you to select English or Japa-

nese as the display language. The default display lan-

guage is English, but if you switch to Japanese the

lyrics, file names, and some messages will be dis-

played in Japanese where appropriate.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons a number of times until the “Lan-

guage” item appears.

The currently selected display language will

appear below the “Language” item.

When highlighted you can use the [+] and [-] but-

tons to select the language as required.

Select a display language.

The [+] button selects English and the [-] button

selects Japanese.

The language selection will be stored in the inter-

nal flash memory so that it is retained even when

the power is turned off.

Metronome volume

Language item

The currently selected

language

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Voice Settings

Voice Editing

Create original voices by editing the many available

voice parameters. By editing the various parameters

available you can create new voices that best suit your

musical needs.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in the

display.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the item you want to edit.

You can individually adjust the voice setting (Vol-

ume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level

and DSP Level) that is applied to the main, dual,

and split voices. Refer to the Functions on

page

for details.

Use the dial to set the value.

Edited parameters can be saved to registration

memory. If you select a different keyboard voice

the parameters will be reset and the ideal settings

for the selected voice will be automatically

recalled.

Category Function Item Range/Settings

MAIN VOICE

Main Volume 000–127

Main Octave -2–+2

Main Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Main Reverb Level 000–127

Main Chorus Level 000–127

Main DSP Level 000–127

DUAL VOICE

Dual Volume 000–127

Dual Octave -2–+2

Dual Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Dual Reverb Level 000–127

Dual Chorus Level 000–127

Dual DSP Level 000–127

SPLIT VOICE

Split Volume 000–127

Split Octave -2–+2

Split Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Split Reverb Level 000–127

Split Chorus Level 000–127

Voice Settings

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Selecting a Dual Voice

Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] but-

ton for longer than a second.

The dual voice selection display will appear.

Select the desired dual voice.

Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial

until the voice you want to use is selected. The

voice selected here becomes the dual voice.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Selecting a Split Voice

Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] but-

ton for longer than a second.

The split voice selection display will appear.

Select the desired split voice.

Watch the highlighted split voice and rotate the

dial until the voice you want to use is selected.

The voice selected here becomes the split voice

which will play to the left of the keyboard split

point.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Hold for longer

than a second.

Hold for longer

than a second.

Voice Settings

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Pitch Controls (Transpose)

The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted up

or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone incre-

ments.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the Transpose item.

Use the dial to set the transpose value

between -12 and +12 as required.

Pitch Controls (Tuning)

The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted up

or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent incre-

ments (100 cents = 1 semitone).

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the Tuning item.

Use the dial to set the tuning value

between -100 and +100 as required.

• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.

Transpose item

Can be set between -12

and +12

NOTE

• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.

Tuning item

Can be set between -100

and +100

NOTE

Voice Settings

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Touch Response Sensitivity

You can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in the

display.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the Touch Sensitivity

item.

The currently selected touch sensitivity will be

displayed.

Use the dial to select a touch sensitivity

setting between 1 and 3. Higher values

produce greater (easier) volume varia-

tion in response to keyboard dynamics

—i.e. greater sensitivity.

A setting of “4” results in a fixed touch response,

or no level change no matter how hard or how

soft you play the keys.

Touch Sensitivity item

• The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”.

NOTE

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 24 of

the Quick Guide.

Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment proce-

dure, and more.

Pattern Variation (Sections)

The instrument features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompa-

niment to match the song you are playing.

INTRO section

This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the

main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

MAIN section

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats

indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and

B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand.

Fill-in section

This is automatically added before changing to section A or B.

ENDING section

This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops auto-

matically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

Intro Main A/B

Ending Auto fill

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Press the [STYLE] button and then

select a style.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to

turn auto accompaniment on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

synchro start on.

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

You’re now ready to play the intro.

As soon as you play a chord with your

left hand, the Intro of the selected Style

starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown

below). For information on how to enter chords,

see “Chords” on page 27.

Synchro Start

When the synchro start standby mode is

engaged, style playback will begin as soon as

you play a chord in the accompaniment range

of the keyboard. You can disengage the syn-

chro-start standby mode by pressing the

[SYNC START] button again.

Appears when auto

accompaniment is on.

The indicator will flash when

the synchro start standby

mode will be engaged.

The name of the selected section—

MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed.

Split point

Accompaniment range

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into

the selected main section A/B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

This switches to the ending section.

When the ending is finished, the auto accompani-

ment stops automatically. You can have the ending

gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the

[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the end-

ing is playing back.

Synchro Stop

When this function is selected the accompaniment

style will only play while you are playing chords in

the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Style

playback will stop when you release the keys. To

turn the function on, press the [SYNC STOP] button.

The style will play

while you are playing

the keys

Style playback will

stop when you

release the keys

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Changing the tempo of the Style

Styles can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or

slow.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call

up the Tempo setting in the display

after selecting a Style.

Use the dial to select a tempo from 011

to 280 quarter-note beats per minute.

Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

instantly reset the value to the default tempo of a

Style.

You can change the tempo during style playback

by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice.

Adjusting the Style Volume

Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style func-

tion.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the Style Volume item.

Use the dial to set the style volume

between 000 and 127.

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Setting the Split Point

The initial default split point is key number 54 (the

F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using

the procedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the Split point item.

Use the dial to set the split point to any

key from 021(A-1) through 108 (C7).

Play a Style with Chords but No

Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment)

When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon

is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play

chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the

keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the

accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompani-

ment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by

the instrument can be used.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn

auto accompaniment on after pressing the

[STYLE] button.

• When you change the split point the auto-accompani-

ment split point also changes.

• The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson.

• The split voice sounds when the split-point key is played.

Split point (54 : F#2)

Split voice

Main voice

NOTE

Appears when auto accompaniment is on

Accompani-

ment range

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

AI Fingered

Less than three notes can be played to indicate the

chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.).

Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] but-

ton for longer than a second to select

the function “Chord Fingering”.

In this mode Easy Chords cannot be detected.

Use the dial to select 3 “AI Fingered”.

To reset the chord fingering to default setting,

select 1 “Multi Finger”.

Playing Styles Using the Entire

Keyboard

In “Play Along with a Style” on page 25 we described

a method of playing styles in which chords were

detected only to the left of the keyboard split point. By

making the settings described below, however, chord

detection for style accompaniment occurs over the

entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even more

dynamic style performance. In this mode Easy Chords

cannot be detected.

Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] but-

ton for longer than a second to select

the function “Chord Fingering”.

Use the dial to select 2 “FullKeyboard”.

To reset the chord fingering to default setting,

select 1 “Multi Finger”.

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary

The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is

ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.

Press and hold the [MINUS ONE] button

for longer than a second.

As an example, we’ll learn how to play a

GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the

“G” key in the section of the keyboard

labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t

sound.) The root note you set is shown

in the display.

Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in

the section of the keyboard labeled

“CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t

sound.) The notes you should play for

the specified chord (root note and chord

type) are shown in the display, both as

notation and in the keyboard diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord, press

the [+]/[-] buttons.

Try playing a chord in the auto accom-

paniment section of the keyboard,

checking the indications in the display.

When you’ve played the chord properly,

a bell sound signals your success and

the chord name in the display flash.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Hold for longer

than a second.

• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually

indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers

to C major. However, when specifying major chords

here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the

root note.

• Be aware that the chord types explained here are the

left-hand notes applied to various styles and different

from the one for the performance assistant technology

feature.

Chord name (root and type)Notation of chord

Individual notes of chord (keyboard)

NOTE

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Song Settings

Changing the tempo of the Song

Songs can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or

slow.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call

up the Tempo setting in the display

after selecting a Song.

Use the dial to select a tempo from 011

to 280 quarter-note beats per minute.

Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

instantly reset the value to the default tempo of a

Song.

You can change the tempo during song playback

by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice.

Song Volume

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the Song Volume item.

Use the dial to set the song volume

between 000 and 127.

Current Tempo value

• Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected.

Song volume item

Can be set between 000 and 127

NOTE

Song Settings

Owner’s Manual

Reference

A-B Repeat

You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the start

point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback.

Play the song and press the [A-B

REPEAT] button at the beginning of the

section you want to repeat (the “A”

point).

Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec-

ond time at the end of the section you

want to repeat (the “B” point).

The specified A-B section of the song

will now play repeatedly.

You can stop repeat playback at any time by

pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.

Muting Independent Song Tracks

Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the

song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. You

can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on

the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks other

than the ones you want to listen to. To mute a track,

press the appropriate track button (TRACK [1]–[5],

[A]) button. Press the same button a second time to

disengage track muting.

Change the Melody Voice

You can change a song’s melody voice to any other

voice you prefer.

Press the [VOICE] button for longer than a second

during the song playback. The VOICE SELECT

(MELODY R or MELODY L) display will appear so

you can select the Melody R or Melody L voice.

Pressing the [VOICE] button alternates between

VOICE SELECT MELODY R and MELODY L. Use

the dial to select the voice. As you select different

melody voices, only the melody voice changes while

the song will remain the same.

• Repeat start and end points cannot be specified within

the same measure While the song is stopped.

• The current measure number is shown in the display

during playback.

• If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning

of the song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before start-

ing playback of the song.

NOTE

Track number with border

... track contains data and is not muted.

Track number without border

... track contains data but is muted.

No track number ... no data.

Song Settings

Owner’s Manual

Reference

BGM Playback

With the default setting only one demo song is played

back and repeated when the [DEMO/BGM] button is

pressed. This setting can be changed so that all inter-

nal songs, all songs transferred to the instrument from

a computer, or all MIDI songs on a USB flash mem-

ory connected to the instrument are played. Five play-

back group settings are provided. Simply select the

one that suits your needs.

Press and hold the [DEMO/BGM] button

for longer than a second to call up the

“Demo Group” selection display.

The currently selected repeat playback target will

appear.

Use the dial to select a repeat playback

group from the table below.

Random Song Playback

The random play mode causes the songs in the group

selected for BGM playback to be played back in ran-

dom order.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select “Demo Play Mode”.

The currently selected repeat playback mode will

appear.

You cannot select the repeat playback mode when

“Demo” is selected as the repeat playback group.

Use the dial to select “Random”.

If you want to restore the normal playback mode,

select “Normal”.

Demo Demo Song

Preset All preset songs

User All User songs

Download

All songs transferred from a

computer

USB

All songs stored on a USB

flash memory connected to the

instrument.

Hold for longer

than a second.

Owner’s Manual

Reference

The Functions

The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tun-

ing, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the func-

tion list starting on the opposite page. There are 53 function parameters in all.

When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display

name and adjust as required.

Selecting and Setting Functions

Find the function you want to set in the

list that begins on page 87.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Select a function.

Press the CATEGORY [

] and [

] buttons as

many times as necessary until the function’s dis-

play name appears in the display.

Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or

the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the

selected function as required.

The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/OFF

type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF.

In some cases the [+] button will initiate execu-

tion of the selected function, and the [-] will can-

cel the selection.

Some Function settings are stored in memory as soon

as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on

page 64 for information on the function settings that

are stored on the instrument.

To restore all initial factor default settings perform the

“Backup Clear” procedure described in the “Initializa-

tion” section on page 64.

The selected

function

Function category

Previous item

Value

Next item

Direct

numeric entry.

Press simultane-

ously to recall the

default setting.

• Increment

value by 1.

•ON

•Execute

•Decrement

value by 1.

•OFF

• Cancel

The Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Function Setting List

Category Function Item Range/Settings Description

VOLUME

Style Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style.

Song Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song.

OVERALL

Transpose -12–+12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments.

Tuning -100–+100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.

Pitch Bend Range 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments.

Split Point 021(A-1)–108(C7)

Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—in

other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) voices.

The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automati-

cally set to the same value.

Touch Sensitivity

1(Soft),

2(Medium),

3(Hard),

4(Off)

Determines the sensitivity of the feature.

Chord Fingering

1(Multi Finger),

2(FullKeyboard),

3(AI Fingered)

Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode both normal chords

and simple chords played to the left of the split point are detected. In the Full

Keyboard mode normal chords played anywhere on the keyboard will be

detected, and the notes played will be sound as well. In the AI Fingered

mode, less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on

the previously played chord, etc.).

MAIN VOICE

Main Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice.

Main Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice.

Main Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The value

“0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the

sound being panned full right.

Main Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect.

Main Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect.

Main DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect.

DUAL VOICE

Dual Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice.

Dual Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice.

Dual Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The value

“0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the

sound being panned full right.

Dual Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect.

Dual Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect.

Dual DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect.

SPLIT VOICE

Split Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice.

Split Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice.

Split Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The value

“0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the

sound being panned full right.

Split Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect.

Split Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect.

The Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

EFFECT

Reverb Type 01–36 Determines the Reverb type, including off.

Chorus Type 1–45 Determines the Chorus type, including off.

DSP ON/OFF ON/OFF Determines whether the DSP effect is on or off.

DSP Type 001–239 Determines the DSP type.

Sustain ON/OFF

Determines whether or not panel sustain is always applied to the MAIN/

DUAL voices. Panel sustain is applied continuously when ON, or not applied

when OFF.

Master EQ Type

1(Speaker 1),

2(Speaker 2),

3(Headphones),

4(Line Out 1),

5(Line Out 2)

Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in differ-

ent listening situations.

HARMONY

Harmony Type 01–26 Determines the Harmony type.

Harmony Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.

PAT P.A.T. Ty p e

CHORD,

CHORD/FREE,

MELODY,

CHORD/MELODY

Determines the performance assistant technology feature type.

PC PC Mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer.

MIDI

Local ON/OFF

Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone

generator (ON) or not (OFF).

External Clock ON/OFF

Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF)

or an external clock (ON).

Keyboard Out ON/OFF

Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is trans-

mitted (ON) or not (OFF).

Style Out ON/OFF

Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)

during Style playback.

Song Out ON/OFF

Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)

during Song playback.

Initial Setup YES/NO

Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to send,

or press [-] to cancel.

METRO-

NOME

Time Signature -

Numerator

01–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

Time Signature -

Denominator

2, 4, 8, 16 Sets the length of each metronome beat.

Bell ON/OFF Determines whether a bell accent will be sounded (ON) or not (OFF).

Metronome Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

SCORE Quantize

1(1/4 note),

2(1/4 note triplet),

3(1/8 note),

4(1/8 note triplet),

5(1/16 note),

6(1/16 note triplet),

7(1/32 note),

8(1/32 note triplet)

Depending on the song data, you can make the score more readable by

adjusting the timing of the notes.

This determines the minimum timing resolution used in the song. For exam-

ple, if there are both quarter notes and eighth notes in the song, you should

set this value to “eighth note”. Any notes or rests shorter than this value will

not be shown in the score.

SONG/

LESSON

Right-Part

GuideTrack 1–16,

OFF

Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is

effective for songs in SMF format 0 and 1 transferred from a computer.

Left-Part

GuideTrack 1–16,

OFF

Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is

effective for songs in SMF format 0 and 1 transferred from a computer.

LESSON Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off.

Category Function Item Range/Settings Description

The Functions

Owner’s Manual

Reference

* All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously.

(The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.)

DEMO

Demo Cancel ON/OFF

Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON,

the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/BGM] button is pressed.

DEMO GROUP

1(Demo),

2(Preset),

3(User),

4(Download),

5(USB)

Determines the repeat playback group.

DEMO PLAY MODE

1(Normal)/

2(Random)

Determines the repeat playback mode.

LANGUAGE Language English/Japanese

Determines the display language for the song file names, lyrics and certain

display messages. All other messages and names are displayed in English.

When this is set to Japanese, the file names are displayed in the Japanese

font. The lyrics display follows the language setting originally made in the

song data; however, when no such setting exists, the setting here is used.

Category Function Item Range/Settings Description

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Saving and Loading Data

USB flash memory is a memory medium used for storing data.

When a USB flash memory is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal,

registered settings can be saved from or loaded into the instrument.

In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB flash

memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them.

Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the USB TO

DEVICE terminal” section on page 91.

Connecting a USB Flash Memory

Connect a USB flash memory to the

USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful

to insert it with the proper orientation.

Wait for confirmation that the USB flash

memory has been properly mounted.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to

call up the FILE CONTROL display.

You can access file operations listed below by

pressing the category [

] and [

] buttons from

FILE CONTROL display.

If you press the [FILE CONTROL] button while

an unformatted USB flash memory is connected

to the instrument, the “Format” function will

automatically be selected.

To exit from the FILE CONTROL display press

the [EXIT] button.

A message (information or confirmation dia-

log) sometimes appears on the display to facili-

tate operation. Refer to the “Messages” on

page 110 for an explanation of each message.

Mounting

(Flashing)

Mounted

(Lit)

Menu Reference page

Format 92

User File Save 93

User Song Save 94

Load 95

USB Delete 96

User Delete 96

• No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard

while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Also, in

this state only buttons related to file functions will be

active.

• The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the

following cases:

• During style or song playback.

• During a lesson.

• While data is being loaded from a USB flash memory.

NOTE

Saving and Loading Data

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Precautions when using the USB

TO DEVICE terminal

This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE

terminal. When connecting a USB device to the termi-

nal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Fol-

low the important precautions below.

Compatible USB devices

• USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk

drive)

The instrument does not necessarily support all com-

mercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot

guarantee operation of USB devices that you pur-

chase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with

this instrument, please visit the following web page:

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

Connecting USB device

• When connecting a USB device to the USB TO

DEVICE terminal, make sure that the connector on

the device is appropriate and that it is connected in

the proper direction.

• Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 stan-

dard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage

device with the instrument. However, note that the

transfer speed is that of USB 1.1.

Using USB Storage Devices

By connecting the instrument to a USB storage

device, you can save data you’ve created to the con-

nected device, as well as read data from the connected

device.

The number of USB storage device

to be used

Only one USB storage devices can be connected to

the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Formatting USB storage media

When a USB storage device is connected or media is

inserted, a message may appear prompting you to for-

mat the device/media. If so, execute the Format opera-

tion (page 92).

To protect your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently

erased, apply the write-protect provided with each

storage device or media. If you are saving data to the

USB storage device, make sure to disable write-pro-

tect.

Connecting/removing USB storage

device

Before removing the media from the device, make

sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as

in the Save and Delete operations).

• Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the

instrument, they cannot be used for saving data.

• Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse

cannot be used.

NOTE

• Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the

instrument, they cannot be used for saving data.

• The format operation overwrites any previously existing

data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not

contain important data.

• Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB stor-

age device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too

often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instru-

ment “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is

accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and

Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device

(shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB

connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and

do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may

corrupt the data on either or both devices.

NOTE

NOTICE

Saving and Loading Data

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Formatting USB Flash Memory

New USB flash memory must be formatted before

they can be used by this instrument.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the Format item.

The display prompts you for confirmation.

Press the [EXECUTE] button and the

display prompts you for confirmation.

You can press the [-] button at this point to cancel

the operation.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the format operation

will begin.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has fin-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

All the instructions in this chapter are related

to the FILE CONTROL display. To call up the

FILE CONTROL display, press the [FILE

CONTROL] button.

• If a USB flash memory that contains data is formatted as

described below, the data will be erased. Make sure that a

USB flash memory to be formatted contains no important

data before carrying out the formatting procedure.

• Once the format-in-progress message appears on the

display the format operation cannot be canceled.

Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash

memory during this operation.

• If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an

appropriate message will appear on the display and you

will not be able to execute the operation.

NOTICE

NOTE

Saving and Loading Data

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Saving User Files (Registration

Memory) to USB Flash Memory

This operation saves a “User File” containing the reg-

istration memory data to a USB flash memory device.

The User File name will have a “.usr” extension

which will not appear in the instrument’s display.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to locate the Regist Save item.

A default file name will automatically be created.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor

will appear below the first character in

the file name.

Change the file name as necessary.

• The [-] button moves the cursor to the left, and

the [0] button moves it to the right.

• Use the dial to select a character for the current

cursor location.

• The [+] button deletes the character at the cur-

sor location.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for confirmation.

You can cancel the save operation at this point by

pressing the [-] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the save operation

will begin.

User file will be saved in a folder labeled “USER

FILES” which will automatically be created on

the USB flash memory.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has fin-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

To Overwrite an Existing File

If you want to overwrite a file that already exists

on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the

[+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip

ahead to step 4.

• Up to 100 user files can be saved to a single USB flash

memory.

NOTE

Cursor

• Once the save-in-progress message appears on the

display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn

off the power or remove the USB flash memory during

this operation.

• If an existing filename is specified the display prompts

you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to

overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel.

• The amount of time it will take to perform the save opera-

tion will depend on the condition of the USB flash mem-

ory.

The dial selects

characters

Delete

character

Cursor

right

Cursor

left

NOTICE

NOTE

Saving and Loading Data

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Save a User Song to USB Flash

Memory

This operation saves a user song (song numbers 031–

035) to USB flash memory.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to locate the User Song Save item.

The SOURCE FILE—a user song name—will be

highlighted.

Select the source user song.

You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simultane-

ously to select the first user song.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

The DESTINATION SONG will be highlighted,

and a default name will automatically be created.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A cursor will appear below the first character in

the file name.

Change the file name as necessary.

Refer to “Saving User Files (Registration Mem-

ory) to USB Flash Memory” on page 93 for file-

name entry.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for confirmation.

You can cancel the save operation at this point by

pressing the [-] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the save operation

will begin.

User song will be saved in a folder labeled

“USER FILES” which will automatically be cre-

ated on the USB flash memory.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has fin-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

To Overwrite an Existing File

If you want to overwrite a file that already exists

on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the

[+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip

ahead to step 6.

The source user

song name.

• Once the save-in-progress message appears on the

display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn

off the power or remove the USB flash memory during

this operation.

• If an existing filename is specified the display prompts

you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to

overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel.

• The amount of time it will take to perform the save opera-

tion will depend on the condition of the USB flash mem-

ory.

The name of the

file to be saved

Cursor

NOTICE

NOTE

Saving and Loading Data

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Loading Files from a USB Flash

Memory

User files as well as Style, Song, and Music Database

files residing on a USB flash memory can be loaded

into the instrument.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to locate the Load item.

Use the dial to select the file you want

to load.

All user files in the USB flash memory will be

displayed first, followed by the style files, song

files and music database files.

Files must be located in the “User Files” folder in

the USB flash memory. Files located outside of

that folder will not be recognized.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for confirmation.

You can cancel the load operation at this point by

pressing the [-] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the load operation

will begin.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has fin-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

• If you load a User File registration memory data will be

overwritten by the newly loaded data. Save important data

to a USB flash memory before loading data that will over-

write it.

• Once the load-in-progress message appears on the

display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn

off the power or remove the USB flash memory during

this operation.

NOTICE

Saving and Loading Data

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Deleting Data from a USB Flash

Memory

This procedure deletes User, Style and Music Data-

base files and Song files that were created on this

instrument from a USB flash memory.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to locate the USB Delete item.

Use the dial to select the file you want

to delete.

All User files in the USB flash memory will be

displayed first, followed by the style files, song

files and music database files.

Files must be located in the “User Files” folder in

the USB flash memory. Files located outside of

that folder will not be recognized.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for confirmation.

You can cancel the delete operation at this point

by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the delete operation

will begin.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has fin-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Delete User Data from the Instru-

ment

This procedure deletes the User Song as well as Style,

Song, and Music Database files transferred from an

external device such as a computer. This operation

does not erase the preset data.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to locate the User Delete item.

Only “User Delete” can be selected if no USB

flash memory is connected to the instrument.

Use the dial to select the file you want

to delete.

All user songs will be displayed first, followed by

the song, style and music database files.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for confirmation.

You can cancel the delete operation at this point

by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the delete operation

will begin.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has fin-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

• Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the

display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn

off the power or remove the USB flash memory during

this operation.

NOTICE

• Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the

display the operation cannot be canceled.

NOTICE

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Connecting to a Computer

This instrument can be connected to a computer to allow transfer of MIDI data or a file.

Connecting a Personal Computer

In order to be able to communicate with and use

instruments connected to your computer, the appropri-

ate driver software must be properly installed on your

computer. The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence

software and similar applications on your computer to

transmit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI

devices via a USB cable. The USB-MIDI driver is

included on the CD-ROM. Installation of the USB-

MIDI driver is described on page 104.

Precautions when using the USB TO

HOST terminal

When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST

terminal, make sure to observe the following points.

Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and cor-

rupting or losing the data. If the computer or the

instrument freezes, restart the application software or

the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument

off then on again.

• Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3

meters.

• Before connecting the computer to the USB TO

HOST terminal, exit from any power-saving mode

of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby).

• Before turning on the power to the instrument, con-

nect the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal.

• Execute the following before turning the power to

the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the

USB cable to/from the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

• Quit any open application software on the com-

puter.

• Make sure that data is not being transmitted

from the instrument. (Data is transmitted when-

ever you play on the keyboard or play back a

song, etc.)

• While the computer is connected to the instrument,

you should wait for six seconds or more between

these operations: (1) when turning the power of the

instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately

connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

USB terminal USB TO HOST terminal

USB cable

Instrument

MIDI Basics

If you want to know more about MIDI and how to

use it, refer to this introductory book. MIDI Basics is

available for downloading from the Yamaha Manual

Library at:

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

• Connect the instrument to external equipment only after

turning off power for all devices. Then, turn on the power,

first to the instrument, then to the connected external

equipment. Reverse this order when you turn the power

off.

CAUTION

Connecting to a Computer

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer

By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and

performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument.

MIDI settings

These settings pertain to performance data transmis-

sion and reception.

If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this

most likely may be caused by Local Control being set

to off.

If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being

received from an external device, the song, style, and

metronome functions will not start.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the item you want to

change its value.

Use the dial to select ON or OFF.

PC Mode

A number of MIDI settings need to be made when you

want to transfer performance data between the com-

puter and the instrument. The PC Mode item can con-

veniently make multiple settings for you in one

operation. Three settings are available: PC1, PC2, and

OFF.

This setting is not necessary when transferring song or

backup files between the computer and the instru-

ment.

* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the PC mode item.

Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF.

Item

Range/

Settings

Description

Local ON/OFF

Local control determines whether or not

notes played on the instrument are

sounded by its internal tone generator

system: the internal tone generator is

active when local control is on, and inac-

tive when local control is off.

External

Clock

ON/OFF

These settings determine whether the

instrument is synchronized to its own inter-

nal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an

external device (ON).

Keyboard

Out

ON/OFF

These settings determine whether key-

board performance data of the instrument

is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).

Style Out ON/OFF

These settings determine whether Style

data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF)

during Style playback.

Song Out ON/OFF

These settings determine whether User

Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF)

during Song playback.

PC1 PC2* OFF

Local OFF OFF ON

External Clock ON OFF OFF

Song Out OFF OFF OFF

Style Out OFF OFF OFF

Keyboard Out OFF ON ON

• Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instru-

ment by the Song Out function, but User Songs can be.

NOTE

Connecting to a Computer

Owner’s Manual

Reference

Initial Send

This function lets you send the panel setup data to a

computer. Before you record performance data to a

sequencer application running on your computer, it is

a good idea to first send and record the panel setup

data before the actual performance data.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] but-

tons to select the Initial Send item.

Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to

cancel.

Transferring Data Between the

Computer and Instrument

Songs, styles, or Music Database files residing on a

computer or the supplied CD-ROM, can be trans-

ferred to the instrument. Backup file can also be trans-

ferred from the instrument to the computer and back.

In order to transfer files between your computer and

the instrument you will need to install the Musicsoft

Downloader application and the USB-MIDI Driver

included on the Accessory CD-ROM on your com-

puter. Refer to the Accessory CD-ROM Installation

Guide on page 102 for installation details.

With the Musicsoft Downloader You

Can.

 Transfer files from the computer to the instrument’s

flash memory.

 refer to the procedure described on page 100.

The procedure for transferring songs included on

the Accessory CD-ROM from your computer to

the instrument is given as an example.

 Backup file can be transferred from the instrument

to a computer and back.

 refer to the procedure described on page 101.

* Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with Internet

Explorer 5.5 or higher.

Data that can be transferred from a computer

to this instrument.

Data Capacity: 1895KB

502 files total for the Song, Style and Music

Database.

Data Format

Song: .mid SMF format 0/1

Style: .sty

Music Database: .mfd

Backup File: 10PG88G.bup

What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)?

The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the

most common and widely compatible sequence for-

mats used for storing sequence data. There are two

variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number

of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0,

and most commercially available MIDI sequence

data is provided in SMF Format 0.

Connecting to a Computer

Owner’s Manual

100

Reference

Use Musicsoft Downloader To

Transfer Songs From the Accessory

CD-ROM To the Instrument’s flash

memory

Install the Musicsoft Downloader and

USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then

connect the computer and the instru-

ment (page 104).

Insert the included CD-ROM into the

CD-ROM drive.

Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader

shortcut icon that is created on the

desktop.

This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader appli-

cation and the main window will appear.

Click the “Add File” button and the Add

File window will appear.

Click the button to the right of “Look in”

and select the CD-ROM drive from the

drop-down menu that appears. Double-

click the “SampleData” Folder on the

window. Select the file from the “Song-

Data” Folder you want to transfer to the

instrument, and click “Open”.

At this point you can select a Style or Music

Database file on the computer or CD-ROM and

transfer it to the instrument in the same way as a

song file.

A copy of the selected MIDI song file

will appear in the “List of files stored

temporarily” at the top of the window.

The memory medium will also be displayed at the

bottom of the window to specify the destination

for the transfer. Click “Instrument”, and then

“Flash memory”.

After selecting the file in the “List of

files stored temporarily”, click the down-

ward [Move] button and a confirmation

message will appear. Click [OK] and the

song will be transferred from the “List

of files stored temporarily” to the instru-

ment’s memory.

• If a song or style is being played, stop playback before pro-

ceeding.

• The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft

Downloader is running.

NOTE

w Double-click “SampleData”

Folder  “SongData” Folder,

and click a song file.

e Click

“Open”

q Click the CD-ROM drive

• Files transferred to a USB flash memory root directory

using the Musicsoft Downloader—any location outside

the USER FILES folder on the USB flash memory

device—cannot be deleted via the instrument’s file con-

trol display. Use the Musicsoft Downloader delete button

to delete such files.

q Click the “Electronic Musical Instru-

ments”, and then “Flash Memory”

NOTE

Connecting to a Computer

Owner’s Manual

101

Reference

Close the window to end the Musicsoft

Downloader.

To playback a song stored in flash

memory, press the [SONG] button.

Use the dial to select the song you want

to play, then press the [START/STOP]

button to start playback.

Transfer a Backup file from the

instrument to a computer

You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer

“Backup” files containing Registration Memory and

FUNCTION settings to a computer. If you click

“Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft

Downloader display, and then “System Drive”, a file

named “10PG88G.bup” will appear in the lower right

corner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is

the backup file. For details about how to transfer

backup files using the Musicsoft Downloader applica-

tion, refer to the Online help “Transferring Data

Between the Computer and Instrument (for unpro-

tected data)” in the application.

• End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the file trans-

ferred from your computer.

• Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not

only will the data not be transferred and saved, but opera-

tion of the memory media may become unstable and its

contents may disappear completely when the power is

turned on or off.

• Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or

improper operation. For safety we recommend that you

keep a copy of all important data stored on your computer.

To Use transferred Songs For Lessons...

When using songs (only SMF format 0 and 1) trans-

ferred from a computer for lessons you can specify

which channels are to be played back as the right-

hand and left-hand parts.

1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song

(036–) residing in flash memory for which you

want to set the guide track.

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

3 Use the CATEGORY [

] and [

] buttons to

select the R-Part or L-Part item.

4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to

play back as the specified right- or left-hand

part.

The default settings are channel 1 for the right-hand

part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.

NOTE

NOTICE

• The backup file is transmitted/received as a single file. As a

result, all registration memory data will be overwritten

every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when

transferring data.

• Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do

so it will not be recognized when transferred to the instru-

ment.

NOTICE

Owner’s Manual

102

Reference

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

• The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.

• Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to

upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement on

page 108 before installing the application.)

• Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden

without the written consent of the manufacturer.

• Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and

cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software.

• This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player,

etc.). Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer.

• The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat dif-

ferent from the screens which appear on your computer.

• Software such as the USB-MIDI driver may be revised and updated without prior notice. Make sure to check

and download the latest version of the software from the following site.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

• Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be

announced separately.

Important Notices about the CD-ROM

Data Types

This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 104 for software installation instructions.

Operating System (OS)

The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems.

SPECIAL NOTICES

• Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on equipment other

than a computer. The result high-volume noise can poten-

tially cause hearing damage or damage your equipment.

CAUTION

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Owner’s Manual

103

Reference

CD-ROM Contents

When the included CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, the following start window will appear automat-

ically. (If the start window does not appear automatically, open the “My computer” folder and double click

“Start.exe” in the CD-ROM drive.)

In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer.

Adobe Reader can be downloaded free at the Adobe website.

Folder Name Application / Data Name Contents

MSD_ Musicsoft Downloader

This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the

Internet and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s mem-

ory.

Refer to page 104 for installation instructions.

USBdrv32_

USB-MIDI Driver

(for 32-bit version Windows

2000/XP/Vista/7)

This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your

computer via USB.

Refer to page 104 for installation instructions.

USBdrv64_

USB-MIDI Driver

(for 64-bit version Windows

XP/Vista/7)

SongBook Song Book

Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instru-

ment as well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The

exceptions are songs 1–11 and 30. The scores for songs 9–11 are

provided in the separate Data List.

SampleData

SongData MIDI 70 songs

These songs, styles, or data can be transferred to the instrument

and played or used with the instrument’s functions.

StyleData 5 style files

MDB 5 Music Database data

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Owner’s Manual

104

Reference

System Requirements

Software Installation

If you have any problems with the installation, refer to

the troubleshooting section on page 106.

Installing / Updating the USB-MIDI

Driver

In order to be able to communicate with and use MIDI

instruments connected to your computer, the appropri-

ate driver software must be properly installed on your

computer.

The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software and

similar applications on your computer to transmit and

receive MIDI data to and from instruments via a USB

cable.

Follow the steps below to install (or update) the USB-

MIDI driver.

Disconnect all USB devices from the

computer except for the mouse and

computer keyboard.

Start the computer and use the “Admin-

istrator” account to log on to Windows.

Close all applications and windows that are open.

Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your

computer’s CD-ROM drive.

Turn off the power of the instrument.

Connect the USB connector of the com-

puter to the USB TO HOST terminal of

the MIDI instrument with a standard

USB cable.

Turn on the power of the instrument(s).

When the “Found New Hardware Wiz-

ard” window appears, click [Cancel].

Data OS Computer Memory Hard Disk Display

Musicsoft

Downloader

Windows 2000/XP Home

Edition/XP Professional/Vista

* Only 32-bit is supported.

Windows 7

233 MHz or higher; Intel Pen-

tium/Celeron Processor family

(500 MHz or higher is recom-

mended)

64 MB or more

(256 MB or more is

recommended)

128 MB or more

(at least 512 MB

of free space is

recommended)

800 x 600

HighColor

(16-bit)

USB Driver

for Windows

Windows XP Professional

(SP2/SP3)/XP Home Edition

(SP2/SP3)/2000 (SP4)

166 MHz or higher; Intel Core/

Pentium/Celeron processor

32 MB or more

(64 MB or more is

recommended)

10 MB or more —

Windows XP Professional x64

Edition (SP2)

Intel 64 compatible processor 256 MB or more 10 MB or more —

Windows Vista (SP0/SP1/SP2)

800 MHz or higher; Intel Core/

Pentium/Celeron processor or

Intel 64 compatible processor

512 MB or more 10 MB or more —

Windows 7

1.4 GHz or higher; Intel Core/

Pentium/Celeron processor or

Intel 64 compatible processor

1 GB or more

(32-bit)/2 GB or

more (64-bit)

10 MB or more —

• The example displays shown in this guide are in English.

NOTE

MIDI instrument

Computer

Sequence

software

Driver

USB Cable

• Do not use a USB hub for connecting multiple USB

devices.

• If you are using several MIDI instruments with USB con-

nection at the same time, connect all the instruments to

the computer and turn on the power for all of them, then

perform the following installation procedure.

• On some computers, it may take a few minutes before

this screen appears.

NOTE

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Owner’s Manual

105

Reference

Open the following folder from the CD-

ROM drive in your “My Computer”

folder, and double click “setup.exe.”

• For users of 32 bit version Windows 2000/XP/

Vista/7: “USBdrv32_”

• For users of 64 bit version Windows XP/Vista/7:

“USBdrv64_”

* Select [Start] menu  [Control Panel]  [System] to

check the system. (Windows XP: “x64 Edition”

appears on the 64 bit version, and does not appear on

the 32 bit version.)

When the “File Download” window

appears, click [Run] or [Open].

The “Preparing to install” window appears. The

next window will appear after finishing this prep-

aration.

When the “Welcome to the InstallShield

Wizard for Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver”

window appears, click [Next].

If the warning message below appears during the

installation, click [Yes], [Continue Anyway], or

[Install].

When a message appears indicating

that the driver has been successfully

installed, click [Finish].

When a window appears prompting you

to restart the computer, do so.

Restart the computer by following the on-screen

directions.

• This screen will not appear on Windows 7. When the

message “Device driver software was not successfully

installed.” appears, continue the installation procedure.

• This screen will not appear if you are updating the USB-

MIDI driver from the previous version. Continue the

installation procedure.

• The messages that appear in this window may differ

somewhat depending on your browser.

• (Windows XP) If the “Security Warning” window

appears, click [Run].

• (Windows Vista/7) If the “User Account Control” window

appears, click [Continue] or [Yes].

NOTE

Windows 2000

• On some computers, it may take a few minutes before

this screen appears.

• This display will not appear when using Windows XP

x64/Vista/7. No restart is necessary.

Checking the version of the driver

Open the “Control Panel” and double-click the

“Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” icon.

A window appears and the driver version is indicated

in the lower left of the window.

Windows XP

Windows Vista/7

NOTE

• When using Windows XP x64/Vista/7, double-click the

“Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver (WDM)” icon.

NOTE

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Owner’s Manual

106

Reference

Installing the Musicsoft Downloader

Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your

computer’s CD-ROM drive.

The start window will appear automatically

showing software applications.

Click [Musicsoft Downloader].

Click the [Install] button, and follow the

on-screen instructions to install the

software.

For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions

see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft Down-

loader application and click “Help”.

* You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft

Downloader at the following web site.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

Troubleshooting

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?

Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the

USB cable, then connect it again.

• Is the USB function enabled on your computer?

When you connect the instrument to the computer

for the first time, if the “Add (Found) New Hard-

ware Wizard” or the “Found New Hardware” win-

dow does not appear, the USB function on the

computer may be disabled. Perform the following

steps.

1 Select [Control Panel]*  [System]  [Hard-

ware]  [Device Manager] (for Windows

2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] 

[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista/7).

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear

at “Universal serial bus controller” or “USB

Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x” mark, the

USB controller is disabled.

• Is any unknown device registered?

If driver installation fails, the instrument will be

marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will not

be able to install the driver. Delete the “Unknown

device” by following the steps below.

1 Select [Control Panel]*  [System]  [Hard-

ware]  [Device Manager] (for Windows

2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] 

[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista/7).

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu “View

devices by type”.

3 If you find “Other devices”, double-click it to

extend the tree to look for “Unknown

device”. If one appears, select it and click

the [Remove] button.

4 Remove the USB cable from the instrument,

and make the connection again.

5 Install the driver again. (pages 104–105)

• You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges

in order to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer

running Windows 2000, XP, Vista or 7.

• If the start window does not appear automatically, open

the “My Computer” folder and double click “Start.exe” in

the CD-ROM drive. Then, proceed to step 2 below.

• Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files

between this instrument and a computer. No other file

transfer application can be used.

IMPORTANT

NOTE

IMPORTANT

The driver cannot be installed.

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Owner’s Manual

107

Reference

• Did you install the driver? (page 104)

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?

• Are the volume settings of the instrument, play-

back device, and application program set to the

appropriate levels?

• Have you selected an appropriate port in the

sequence software?

• Are you using the latest USB MIDI driver? The

latest driver can be downloaded from the follow-

ing web site.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

• Does your computer satisfy the system require-

ments?

• Is any other application or device driver run-

ning?

• Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI

application is running.

If you are using Windows 2000, you may not be

able to suspend/resume normally, depending on the

particular environment (USB Host Controller, etc.).

Even so, simply disconnecting and connecting the

USB cable will allow you to use the instrument

functions again.

[Windows 2000/XP]

1 Disconnect all USB devices from the com-

puter except for the mouse and keyboard.

2 Start the computer and log on to the

Administrator account.

Exit from any open applications and close all

open windows.

3 From the [Start] menu, select ([Settings] )

[Control Panel]  [Add or Remove Pro-

grams] to display the Add or Remove Pro-

grams panel.

4 Click “Change or Remove Programs”

located in the upper left, then select

“Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” or “Yamaha

Musicsoft Downloader” from the list in the

right panel.

5 Click [Remove].

A dialog box appears. Follow the instructions to

remove the software.

[Windows Vista/7]

1 Disconnect all USB devices from the com-

puter except for the mouse and keyboard.

2 Start the computer and log on to the

Administrator account.

Exit from any open applications and close all

open windows.

3 From the [Start] menu, select the [Control

Panel]  [Programs and Features] or [Unin-

stall a program] to display the “Uninstall or

change a program” window.

4 Select “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” or

“Yamaha Musicsoft Downloader” from the

list.

5 Click [Uninstall].

If the “User Account Control” window appears,

click [Allow] or [Continue].

A dialog box appears. Follow the instructions to

remove the software.

When controlling the instrument from your

computer via USB, the instrument does not

operate correctly or no sound is heard.

Playback response is delayed.

Cannot suspend or resume the computer cor-

rectly.

How can I remove the software?

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Owner’s Manual

108

Reference

ATTENTION

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREE-

MENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE

ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT

IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND

YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”).

BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING

TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT

AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE

USE THIS SOFTWARE.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT

Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s)

and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFT-

WARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data.

The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is pro-

tected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While

you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFT-

WARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copy-

rights.

• You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer.

• You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for

backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup

copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copy-

right notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy

of the SOFTWARE.

• You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFT-

WARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads and

agrees to the terms of this Agreement.

2. RESTRICTIONS

• You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or

otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method

whatsoever.

• You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFT-

WARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE.

• You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to

another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers.

• You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that vio-

lates public policy.

• You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without

permission by Yamaha Corporation.

Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by

means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you

must observe.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any com-

mercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, trans-

ferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public

without permission of the copyright owner.

• The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be

removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission

of the copyright owner.

3. TERMINATION

This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE

and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of

this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and

immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must

immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written doc-

uments and all copies thereof.

4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA

As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible

media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in mate-

rials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days

from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire

liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media

if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days

with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media dam-

aged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PER-

MITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED

WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTIC-

ULAR PURPOSE.

5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE

You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your

sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS”

and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER

PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS

ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND

NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT

WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT WAR-

RANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS,

THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTER-

RUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE

WILL BE CORRECTED.

6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PER-

MIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO

EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PER-

SON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,

EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARIS-

ING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFT-

WARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall

Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action

(whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFT-

WA RE.

7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE

Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be

attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data

accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide

by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFT-

WARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is

responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof.

• Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFT-

WARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

• Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

• Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including,

without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages,

expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, mis-

use or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

8. GENERAL

This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese

law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or proce-

dure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a

court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unen-

forceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and

effect.

9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT

This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with

respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and

supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written

or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or revi-

sion of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a fully

authorized representative of Yamaha.

Owner’s Manual

109

Appendix

Troubleshooting

For the Instrument

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical

power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce

interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further

away from the instrument.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is

played or when a song or style is being played

back.

Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the

rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no

sound is output.

Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 98.)

Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard,

etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is

showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard

does not produce any sound.

When using the Dictionary function (page 82), the keys in the right hand

area are used only for entering the chord root and type.

The style or song does not play back when the

[START/STOP] button is pressed.

Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF;

refer to “External Clock” on page 98.

The style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 79) is set to an appropriate level.

Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are playing?

Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 80).

Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press

the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.

No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/

STOP] button is pressed after selecting style num-

ber 136 or a style between 148–165 (Pianist).

This is not a malfunction. Style number 136 and style numbers 148–165

(Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts

will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of

the keyboard if style playback is turned on.

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound

seems to be cut off.

The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 64 notes. If the Dual

voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at

the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the

accompaniment or song.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the

opposite effect. For example, pressing the foot-

switch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains

the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch

plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the

power.

The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple record-

ings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus,

the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.

There are Japanese characters in the display mes-

sages.

Make sure the Language setting in the FUNCTION display is set to Eng-

lish. (See page 71)

The appropriate display does not appear when the

[SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE], or

[VOICE] button is pressed.

Is another display showing? Try pressing the [EXIT] button to return to

the MAIN display, and then pressing one of the mentioned buttons.

The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is

played.

Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn it off.

The ACMP indicator does not appear when the

[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any

style-related function.

The “OverCurrent” message is shown in the upper

area of the MAIN display and the USB device does

not respond.

Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of

the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB

TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.

Appendix

Owner’s Manual

110

Appendix

Messages

LCD Message Comment

Access error! Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media or the flash memory.

All Memory Clearing... Displayed while erasing all data in the flash memory. Never turn the power off during

data transmission.

Are you sure? Confirms whether Song Clear or Track Clear is executed or not.

Backup Clearing... Displayed while clearing the back-up data in the flash memory.

Cancel Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send is cancelled.

Can’t clear TrackA. Displayed when a track clear error occurs.

Clearing... Displayed while executing Song Clear or Track Clear of the user songs.

Com Mode Displayed when the Musicsoft Downloader is started on the PC connected to the key-

board. This will not be displayed while the instrument is played back.

Completed Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmission.

Create Directory Displayed while creating a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader application.

Data Error! Displayed when the user song contains illegal data.

Delete File Displayed while deleting a file in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Delete OK ? Confirms whether the Delete job is executed or not.

Delete Directory Displayed while deleting a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Deleting... Displayed while the delete function is engaged.

End Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send has been completed.

Error! Displayed when writing has failed.

Exit. Displayed when the record standby mode is exited because an inappropriate style

has been selected during style record standby.

“File information area is not large enough.” Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total number of

files have become too many.

File is not found. Indicates there is no file.

“File too large. Loading is impossible.” Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the file data is too large.

Flash Clearing... Displayed while clearing the song or style data transmitted to the internal flash mem-

ory.

Format OK ? [EXECUTE] Confirms whether formatting the media is executed or not.

Formatting... Displayed while formatting.

Load OK ? Confirms whether loading is executed or not.

Loading... Displayed while loading data.

Media is not inserted. Displayed when accessing the media while it is not inserted.

Media capacity is full. Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory becomes

full.

Memory Full Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during song recording.

“MIDI receive buffer overflow.” Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to proceed.

Move File Displayed while moving a file in the Musicsoft Downloader.

“Now Writing...

(Don’t turn off the power now, otherwise

the data may be damaged.)”

Displayed while writing data in the memory. Never turn the power off while writing.

Doing so may result in data loss.

OverCurrent Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent

to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then

turn on the power of the instrument.

Overwrite ? Confirms whether overwriting is executed or not.

Please Wait... Displayed when executing the jobs that take some time, such as displaying scores

and lyrics, or stopping recording.

Rename File Displayed while rewriting the file name in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Save OK ? Confirms whether saving is executed or not.

Saved data is not found. Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist.

Messages

Owner’s Manual

111

Appendix

Saving... Displayed while saving data in the memory. Never turn the power off while saving.

Doing so may result in data loss.

Send OK? Confirms whether the data transmission is executed or not.

Sending... Displayed while transmitting data.

“Since the media is in use now, this

function is not available.”

Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the media is being

accessed.

Style data is too large to load. Indicates that style data cannot be loaded since the style data is too large.

Sure ? [YES/NO] Reconfirms whether each operation is executed or not.

“The limit of the media has been reached.” Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory structure has

become too complicated.

The media is not formatted. Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted.

“The media is write-protected.” Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-protected. Set to

the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use.

The notation cannot be displayed, since

this song is not allowed to display the

notation.

This message will appear if you attempt to display the score of a song for which score

display is prohibited.

“The song data is too large to be converted

to notation.”

Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the song data is too large.

There are too many files. Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files exceeds

the capacity.

“This function is not available now.” Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is executing

another job.

[nnn] “file name” Indicates the file name of the currently transmitting. “nnn” indicates the receiving

block.

LCD Message Comment

• Not all the messages are listed in the table: the mes-

sages necessary to be explained only.

NOTE

Owner’s Manual

112

Appendix

Specifications

Keyboards

• 88 Graded Hammer Standard keys (A-1–C7),

with Touch Response.

Display

• 320 x 240 dots LCD display (backlit)

Setup

•STANDBY/ON

• MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX

• LCD CONTRAST

Realtime Control

• Pitch Bend Wheel

Voice

• 142 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 381 XGlite voices

• Polyphony: 64

• DUAL

•SPLIT

Style

• 165 Preset Styles + External files

• Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC

START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/

rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL

• Fingering: Multi Finger, Full Keyboard, AI Fingered

• Style Volume

Music Database

• 305 + External files

Education Feature

• Dictionary

• Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn

Registration Memory

• 8 banks x 4 types

Function

• VOLUME: Style Volume, Song Volume

• OVERALL: Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sen-

sitivity, Pitch Bend Range, Chord Fingering

• MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Cho-

rus Level, DSP Level

• DUAL VOICE:

Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus

Level, DSP Level

• SPLIT VOICE:

Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus

Level

• EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, DSP ON/OFF,

DSP Type, Sustain, Master EQ Type

• HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume

• Performance assistant technology:

Performance assistant technology Type

•PC: PC Mode

•MIDI:

Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send,

Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out

• METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature

Denominator, Metronome Volume, Bell

• SCORE: Quantize

•

SONG/LESSON

: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L)

• LESSON: GRADE

• DEMO: Demo Cancel, DEMO GROUP, DEMO

PLAY MODE

• LANGUAGE: English/Japanese

Effects

• Reverb: 35 types

• Chorus: 44 types

• DSP: 238 types

• Harmony: 26 types

Song

• 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM

Songs (70)

• Song Clear, Track Clear

• Song Volume

• Song Control: REPEAT & LEARN, A-B REPEAT, PAUSE,

REW, FF, START/STOP

Performance assistant technology

• Chord, Chord/Free, Melody, Chord/Melody

Recording

•Song

User Song: 5 Songs

Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE

MIDI

• Local On/Off • Initial Send • External Clock

• Keyboard Out • Style Out • Song Out

Auxiliary jacks

• PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB TO HOST, USB TO DE-

VICE, SUSTAIN, PEDAL UNIT

Amplifier

• 6W + 6W

Speakers

• 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2

Power Supply

• Adaptor: Users within U.S or Europe: PA-150 or an equiv-

alent recommended by Yamaha

Others: PA-5D, PA-150 or an equivalent

Dimensions (W x D x H)

• 1,397 x 445 x 146 mm (55" x 17-1/2" x 5-3/4")

with keyboard stand:

1,399 x 445 x 761 mm (55-1/16" x 17-1/2" x 29-15/16")

Weight

• 20.7kg (45 lbs. 10 oz.)

with keyboard stand: 27.7kg (61 lbs. 1 oz.)

Supplied Accessories

• Data List

•Music Rest

• Accessory CD-ROM

• Keyboard Stand

• Owner’s Manual

• Footswitch

• My Yamaha Product User Registration

* The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out

the User Registration form.

• AC Power adaptor (PA-150 or an equivalent)

* May not be included depending on your particular area.

Optional Accessories

• AC Power Adaptor:

Users within U.S or Europe: PA-150 or an equivalent

recommended by Yamaha

Others: PA-5D, PA-150 or an equivalent

• Headphones: HPE-150

• Pedal Unit: LP-7A

• Footswitch: FC4/5

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for

information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change

or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice.

Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in

every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Owner’s Manual

113

Appendix

Index

A-B Repeat ................................ 84

Accessories ................................. 7

ACMP ........................................ 25

AI Fingered ................... 27, 81, 87

Auto Accompaniment Range .. 25

Auto-Accompaniment ........ 25, 76

Backup ............................... 64, 101

Bell ............................................. 70

Channel ................................... 101

Chord ....................... 26–27, 43, 82

Chord Dictionary ...................... 82

Chord Fingering ............ 27, 81, 87

Chord type (performance

assistant technology)

................ 44

Chord/Free type (performance

assistant technology)

................ 46

Chord/Melody type (performance

assistant technology)

................ 50

Chorus ....................................... 66

Chorus Level ............................. 72

Computer ................................... 97

Default Setting .......................... 86

Delete (Songs transferred from

a computer)

............................... 64

Delete (USB flash memory) .... 96

Delete (User Data) .................... 96

Delete (User Song) ................... 60

Demo ......................................... 31

Demo Cancel ............................ 89

Demo Group ............................. 85

Demo Play Mode ...................... 85

Display ................................ 36–37

Double-Staff Score ................... 32

Drum Kit ................................... 19

DSP ............................................ 67

Dual Voice ........................... 20, 73

Easy Chords ............................... 27

Easy Song Arranger ..................54

Effect ..........................................65

Ending ........................................ 76

External Clock ...........................98

Fast-Forward (FF) ..................... 31

File Control ................................90

File Name .................................. 93

Fill .............................................. 76

Flash Memory ................... 29, 100

Footswitch .................................13

Format (File Control) ................ 92

FullKeyboard .......................81, 87

Function ..................................... 86

Function Display .......................36

Grade ..........................................42

Harmony ....................................65

Harmony Volume ...................... 88

Headphones ............................... 13

Initial Send ................................. 99

Initialization ...............................64

Intro ............................................76

Keyboard Out ............................98

Keyboard Stand Assembly ....... 10

Language ...................................71

Lesson ........................................38

Load ...........................................95

Local ...........................................98

L-Part ....................................... 101

Lyric ...........................................33

Main (Section) .......................... 76

MAIN Display .......................... 36

Main Voice ................................ 18

Master EQ Type ........................ 69

Measure ..................................... 37

Melody ................................. 32, 43

Melody score ............................. 32

Melody type (performance

assistant technology)

................ 48

Melody Voice ...................... 55, 84

Messages ................................. 110

Metronome .................... 22, 70–71

MIDI .......................................... 98

Multi Finger ........................ 81, 87

Music Database ......................... 53

Music Rest ................................... 7

Mute ........................................... 84

notation ...................................... 32

Octave ........................................ 72

One Touch Setting .................... 70

P.A.T. Type ................................ 43

Pan ............................................. 72

Panel Sustain ............................. 68

Part (Right, Left) ....................... 38

PC Mode .................................... 98

Pedal Unit .................................. 14

performance assistant

technology

................................. 43

Pitch Bend ................................. 68

Pitch Bend Range ..................... 87

Power Adaptor .......................... 13

Preset Song ................................ 28

Quantize .................................... 88

Index

Owner’s Manual

114

Appendix

Recording .................................. 56

Registration Memory ............... 62

Repeat .................................. 42, 84

Reverb ........................................ 66

Reverb Level ............................. 72

Rewind (REW) ......................... 31

R-Part ....................................... 101

Save (User File) ........................ 93

Save (User Song) ...................... 94

Score .......................................... 32

Section ....................................... 76

Single-Staff Score ..................... 32

SMF (Standard MIDI File) ...... 99

Song ..................................... 28, 83

Song Clear ................................. 60

Song Out ................................... 98

Split Point ............................ 21, 80

Split Voice ........................... 21, 73

Style ..................................... 24, 76

Style File ................................... 24

Style Out ................................... 98

Sustain (Footswitch) ................. 13

Sustain (Panel) .......................... 68

Synchro Start ...................... 25, 77

Synchro Stop ............................. 78

Tempo (Metronome) ................ 22

Tempo (Song) ........................... 83

Tempo (Style) ........................... 79

Time Signature (Denominator,

Numerator)

................................ 23

Touch Response ........................ 75

Touch Sensitivity ...................... 75

Track .......................................... 57

Track Clear ................................ 61

Transfer ............................... 98–99

Transpose .................................. 74

Troubleshooting .............. 106, 109

Tuning ........................................ 74

USB TO DEVICE ...............30, 90

USB TO HOST ......................... 97

USB-MIDI Driver ...........103–105

User file ......................................93

User File Save ...........................93

User Song ..................................56

Vo i c e ..................................... 18, 72

Volume (Dual Voice) ................72

Volume (Main Voice) ................72

Volume (master) ........................15

Volume (Song) ...........................83

Volume (Split Voice) .................72

Volume (Style) ...........................79

XF ...........................................6, 33

XGlite ...........................................6

Owner’s Manual

115

LIMITED 3-YEAR WARRANTY ON

DIGITAL PIANOS

(DGX SERIES)

Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free

performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every

Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the

Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s

authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted

Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or

Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.

Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or

otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or

materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If

Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or

removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay

the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a)

damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to

follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the

carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been

altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d)

deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e)

damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/

noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of

alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original

Owner and is not transferable.

In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted

Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact

Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local

authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer

has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website

at www.Yamaha.com

. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of

the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase

document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found

ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon

receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.

Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE

APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER

EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.

YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT

YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION

MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to

state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to

assume for it any other express warranty.

If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact:

CUSTOMER SERVICE

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373

Telephone: 800-854-1569

www.yamaha.com

Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA.

Owner’s Manual

116

Owner’s Manual

117

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTO-

NIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Office

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii

Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia

Tel: 495 626 0660

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex

Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-466-5551

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 080-004-0022

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

EKB50

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WT98820 XXXPOXXX.X-01A0

Printed in China

Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page

http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Documenttranscriptie

Setting Up Quick Guide Reference Keyboard Stand Assembly Appendix Owner’s Manual For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions on page 10 of this manual. EN SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) Serial No. Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. 2 Owner’s Manual not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. * This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. (2 wires) Serial No. (bottom) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Piano Model Name : DGX-640 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC. By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. (weee_eu_en) Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, shortcircuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 112) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Do not open If you notice any abnormality • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. • The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. • It emits unusual smells or smoke. • Some object has been dropped into the instrument. • There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Connections • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Handling caution Location • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. (7)-1 4 Owner’s Manual • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. 1/2 Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ](Standby/On) switch is in the “Standby” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. NOTICE To avoid the possibility of damage to the product, data or other property, follow the notices below.  Handling and Maintenance • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. • During extreme changes in temperature or humidity, condensation may occur and water may collect on the surface of the instrument. If water is left, the wooden parts may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to wipe any water off immediately with a soft cloth. –  Saving data • Some data items (page 64) are automatically saved as backup data in the internal memory even if you turn the power off. Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device/or other external device such as a computer (pages 93–94 and 101). • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two USB storage devices/or other external device such as a computer.  About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.  About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original. • This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended.  About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. (7)-1 2/2 Owner’s Manual 5 Logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. STYLE FILE The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. 6 Owner’s Manual About this Owner’s Manual and Data List This manual consists of four main sections: “Setting Up,” “Quick Guide,” “Reference,” and “Appendix.” Also, a separate “Data List” is provided. Owner’s Manual (this book) Setting Up ••••••••• Please read this section first. Quick Guide ••••••••• This section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while playing the instrument. Reference ••••••••• This section explains how to make detailed settings for the instrument’s various functions. Appendix ••••••••• This section includes troubleshooting information and specifications. Data List Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc. MIDI Reference The MIDI Reference section contains MIDI related information. The MIDI Reference is available for downloading from the Yamaha Manual Library at: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Included Accessories The DGX-640 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • AC Power Adaptor • Music rest • Accessory CD-ROM • Owner’s manual (this book) • Keyboard stand • Footswitch * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • Data List • My Yamaha Product User Registration * The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. Owner’s Manual 7 Special Features Graded Hammer Standard Keyboard Thanks to our experience as the world’s leading manufacturer of acoustic pianos, we’ve developed a keyboard with action that’s virtually indistinguishable from the real thing. Just as on a traditional acoustic piano, the keys of the lower notes have a heavier touch, while the higher ones are more responsive to lighter playing. The keyboard’s sensitivity can even be adjusted to match your playing style. This Graded Hammer technology also enables the DGX-640 to provide authentic touch in a lightweight instrument. Performance assistant technology Page 43 Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in time with the music. And if you can’t play with both hands, you can still play the melody simply by tapping one key. Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 18 With the DGX-640, the instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety. Play Along with Styles Page 24 Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance … and much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new styles to expand your musical horizons. Easy Performance with Music Notation Display Page 32 When you play back a song, the corresponding score will be shown on the display as the song plays. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If the song contains lyric and chord data*, the lyrics and chords will also appear on the score display. * No lyrics or chords will appear on the display if the song you are using with the score display function does not contain the appropriate lyric and chord data. 8 Owner’s Manual All you need is one finger! Handy Performance Features Keyboard Stand Assembly .............................................10 Power Requirements......................................................13 Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) .....13 Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack).....................13 Connecting a Pedal Unit (PEDAL UNIT jack).................14 Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)....................15 Turning the Power On ....................................................15 Panel Controls and Terminals 16 Quick Guide Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 18 22 Start the Metronome ......................................................22 Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ...................................22 Setting the Time Signature.............................................23 Playing Styles 24 Select a Style Rhythm ....................................................24 Play Along with a Style...................................................25 Playing Songs 28 Select and Listen to a Song ...........................................28 Select and Play Songs on a USB Flash Memory ...........30 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ..............31 Play the Demo Song ......................................................31 Displaying the Song Score .............................................32 Display the Lyrics ...........................................................33 72 Voice Editing ..................................................................72 Selecting a Dual Voice ...................................................73 Selecting a Split Voice ...................................................73 Pitch Controls (Transpose) ............................................74 Pitch Controls (Tuning) ..................................................74 Touch Response Sensitivity...........................................75 76 Pattern Variation (Sections) ...........................................76 Changing the tempo of the Style....................................79 Adjusting the Style Volume ............................................79 Setting the Split Point.....................................................80 Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) ..................................................80 AI Fingered ....................................................................81 Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard......................81 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ............82 Song Settings 83 Changing the tempo of the Song ...................................83 Song Volume .................................................................83 A-B Repeat ....................................................................84 Muting Independent Song Tracks ..................................84 Change the Melody Voice ..............................................84 BGM Playback ...............................................................85 Random Song Playback ................................................85 The Functions 86 Selecting and Setting Functions ....................................86 Saving and Loading Data 90 Connecting a USB Flash Memory..................................90 Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal ..91 Using USB Storage Devices ..........................................91 Connecting to a Computer Reference Basic Operation 34 Select a Song For a Lesson 38 The Easy Way to Play Piano 43 Play Using the Music Database 53 Change a Song’s Style 54 Record Your Own Performance 56 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 62 Backup and Initialization 64 Backup ...........................................................................64 Initialization ....................................................................64 Play with a Variety of Effects Voice Settings Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Select and Play a Voice—MAIN.....................................18 Play the Grand Piano Voice ...........................................19 Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL ......................20 Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT ...............................................................21 The Metronome Tap Start ........................................................................70 One Touch Setting .........................................................70 Setting the Click bell sound............................................70 Adjusting the Metronome Volume ..................................71 Changing the Display Language ....................................71 65 Adding Harmony ............................................................65 Adding Reverb ...............................................................66 Adding Chorus ...............................................................66 Quick Guide 10 70 Reference Setting Up Setting Up Adding DSP ...................................................................67 Panel Sustain .................................................................68 Pitch Bend......................................................................68 Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound .......................69 97 Connecting a Personal Computer ..................................97 Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer ..98 Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument ......................................................................99 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 102 Important Notices about the CD-ROM .........................102 CD-ROM Contents .......................................................103 System Requirements..................................................104 Software Installation.....................................................104 Appendix About this Owner’s Manual and Data List ........................7 Included Accessories .......................................................7 Special Features ..............................................................8 Setting Up Contents Appendix Troubleshooting 109 Messages 110 Specifications 112 Index 113 Owner’s Manual 9 Setting Up Setting Up Keyboard Stand Assembly Setting Up CAUTION Read these cautions carefully before you assemble or use the keyboard stand. These cautions are to promote safe use of the stand and to prevent injury and damage from occurring to you and others. By following these cautions carefully, your keyboard stand will provide you with safe and prolonged use. • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Use the stand after assembly is complete. An uncompleted stand may overturn or the keyboard may drop. • Always place the stand on a flat, stable surface. Placing the stand on uneven surfaces may cause it to become unstable or overturn, the keyboard to drop, or injury. • Do not use the stand for anything other than its designed purpose. Placing other objects on the stand may result in the object dropping or the stand overturning. • Do not apply excessive force to the keyboard as it may cause the stand to overturn or the keyboard to drop. • Make sure the stand is sturdy and safe, and all screws have been tight and firm before use. If not, the stand may overturn, the keyboard may drop, or may result in injury to the user. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready. 1 The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will be used. Follow the assembly instructions and select the parts as needed. 1 Assembly Parts Back board Side boards Stand bases q Joint connectors (4 pcs.) 10 Owner’s Manual w 6 x 70 mm roundhead screws (4 pcs.) e 6 x 30 mm roundhead screws (4 pcs.) r 5 x 16 mm roundhead screws (4 pcs.) Setting Up 2 Attach the stand bases. q Joint connectors Insert the joint connectors q into the side boards as shown. The joint connectors have been installed properly if you can see the screw head on the connector. Setting Up 2 NOTE • If you put the connectors in wrong direction and want to take them out, tap around the holes on the boards. Attach the “L” (Left) and “R” (Right) stand bases to the bottom of the side boards, using the screws w. “L” (Left) and “R” (Right) are marked on the upper surfaces of the stand bases. If you have trouble fastening the screws, use a screwdriver to rotate the joint connectors so that the connector holes are aligned with the screw holes on the stand bases. “L” “R” w 6 x 70 mm roundhead screws 3 Attach the back board. 3 e 6 x 30 mm roundhead screws Attach the back board, using the screws e. Check the back-to-front orientation for the side boards. Make sure the non-colored surface is facing down. CAUTION • Be careful not to drop the back board or touch the sharp metal fittings. NOTE • If you have purchased an optional pedal unit, attach the pedal unit before proceeding to the next step. Refer to the instructions provided with your pedal unit. Owner’s Manual 11 Setting Up 4 4 Put the keyboard on the stand. Setting Up Be sure to place your hands at least 10 cm from either end of the keyboard when positioning it. Check the back-to-front orientation for stand, and carefully place the keyboard on the side boards. Slowly move the keyboard so that the holes on the bottom of the keyboard are properly aligned with the holes on the angle brackets. CAUTION • Be careful not to drop the keyboard or to get your fingers caught between the keyboard and the stand parts. At least 10 cm • Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position shown in the illustration. At least 10 cm 5 Install the keyboard to the stand. 5 Fix the keyboard to the angle brackets, using the screws r. Post-assembly checklist r 5 x 16 mm roundhead screws 12 Owner’s Manual Once you’ve assembled the stand, check the following points: • Are there any parts left over?  If so, read the assembly instructions again and correct any errors you might have made. • Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable fixtures?  If not, move the instrument to an appropriate location. • Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you play it or move it?  If so, properly tighten all screws. • Also, if the keyboard makes a creaking noise or seems unsteady when you play it, refer carefully to the assembly instructions and diagrams and retighten all screws. Setting Up Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Setting Up Power Requirements 1 Make sure that the [ ](Standby/On) switch of the instrument is in the “Standby” position. WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (page 112). The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument. 2 2 Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack. 3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. AC power adaptor 3 AC outlet Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on. Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. WARNING • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. Any pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4" stereo phone plug can be plugged in here for convenient monitoring. The speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, CAUTION • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) NOTE • The sustain function does not affect split voices. • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the supplied footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. Owner’s Manual 13 Setting Up Connecting a Pedal Unit (PEDAL UNIT jack) Setting Up This jack is for connecting an optional LP-7A pedal unit. When connecting the pedal unit, make sure to also assemble the unit on the supplied keyboard stand. NOTE • Make sure that power is OFF when connecting or disconnecting the pedal. LP-7A (optional) Keyboard Stand Pedal Unit Functions The optional pedal unit has three foot pedals that produce a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. The pedal unit does not affect the split voice when the keyboard is in split mode. Damper (Right) Pedal The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is pressed, notes sustain longer. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. A “half-pedal” effect lets you use the damper pedal to create partial sustain effects, depending on how far down you press the pedal. * When using both the Footswitch and pedal unit, the last effect applied takes priority. When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain. Sostenuto (Center) Pedal If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.” Soft (Left) Pedal The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is pressed. 14 Owner’s Manual When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note, the note will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. Setting Up Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) Setting Up Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB terminal of a computer, and you can transfer performance data and song files between the two (page 97). Turning the Power On The [ ](Standby/On) switch turns the power to the instrument on ( ) or standby ( ). Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [ ](Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. Press the [ ](Standby/On) switch again to turn the power off. Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is turned on. CAUTION • Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. NOTICE • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. Owner’s Manual 15 Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel Song List (Data List) Style List (Data List) Setting Up e r t y q u w i o !0 !3 !1 !2 !4 Front Panel q w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !2 !3 [ ](Standby/On) switch...................... page 15 [MASTER VOLUME] control ................ page 15 [DEMO/BGM] button .................... pages 31, 85 [SCORE] button....................................page 32 [LYRICS] button....................................page 33 [REC] button .........................................page 56 LESSON START [WAITING] button..............................page 38 [YOUR TEMPO] button .....................page 40 [MINUS ONE] button.........................page 41 [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button ........................page 44 [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button....................................................page 54 Song Track [1]–[5], [A] buttons.................... pages 57, 84 Lesson [R/1] and [L/1] buttons .....................page 38 [METRONOME ON/OFF]] button .........page 22 [TEMPO/TAP] button.............. pages 22, 79, 83 SONG [REPEAT&LEARN] button................page 42 [A-B REPEAT] button........................page 84 [REW] button.....................................page 31 [FF] button.........................................page 31 [PAUSE] button .................................page 31 [START/STOP] button .......................page 29 !4 STYLE [ACMP ON/OFF] button.................... page 25 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button ............. page 76 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ................ page 76 [SYNC STOP] button ........................ page 78 [SYNC START] button....................... page 77 [START/STOP] button............... pages 24, 26 !5 REGIST MEMORY [BANK], [1]–[4] buttons ...................................... page 62 !6 CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons ....... page 35 !7 [EXIT] button ........................................ page 36 !8 [FUNCTION] button...................... pages 36, 86 !9 DATA ENTRY Dial, Number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] buttons............................. page 35 @0 [FILE CONTROL] button...................... page 90 @1 [EXECUTE] button ............................... page 92 @2 [PORTABLE GRAND] button............... page 19 @3 [SONG] button...................................... page 28 @4 [STYLE] button..................................... page 24 @5 [VOICE] button ..................................... page 18 @6 [MUSIC DATABASE] button................. page 53 @7 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button ....................... page 21 @8 [DUAL ON/OFF] button ........................ page 20 @9 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ............... page 65 #0 [PITCH BEND] wheel ........................... page 68 #1 Drum Kit ............................................... page 19 The illustrations next to each key indicate the drum and percussion instruments assigned to the keys when “Standard Kit 1” is selected. #2 USB TO DEVICE terminal ............ pages 30, 90 16 Owner’s Manual Panel Controls and Terminals Display (page 36) Voice List (Data List) Setting Up Music Database List (Data List) !9 !6 @0 !7 !8 #2 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 @8 @9 #0 #1 Rear Panel #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 Rear Panel #3 CONTRAST knob .................................page 37 #4 USB TO HOST terminal........................page 97 #5 SUSTAIN jack ....................................... page 13 #6 PEDAL UNIT jack ................................. page 14 #7 PHONES/OUTPUT jack........................ page 13 #8 DC IN jack ............................................. page 13 Owner’s Manual 17 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Quick Guide In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide variety of musical sounds. Select and Play a Voice—MAIN This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The main voice selection display will appear. The currently selected voice number and name will be highlighted. Quick Guide The currently selected voice number and name 2 Select the voice you want to play. While watching the highlighted voice name rotate the dial. The available voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected here becomes the main voice. For this example select the “117 Flute” voice. NOTE • See the separate Data List for a complete list of the available voices. Select 117 Flute 18 Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 3 Play the keyboard. NOTE • Voice Settings (page 72) Adjusts volume. Try selecting and playing a variety of voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 001–142 155–535 Instrument Voices 143–154 (Drum Kit) Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, via which they can be played. Details on assigning instruments to keys are provided in the Drum Kit List of the separate Data List. Quick Guide Preset Voice Types Play the Grand Piano Voice When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. The “001 Live! Grand Piano” voice will be selected. NOTE • When you press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button all settings other than touch sensitivity are turned off. The dual and split voices will also be turned off, so only the Grand Piano voice will play over the entire keyboard. Owner’s Manual 19 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL Once you press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button to turn the dual function on, a second voice will sound that will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. The second voice is known as the “dual” voice. The currently selected dual voice name and number will be displayed in the MAIN display. Two voices will sound at the same time. Quick Guide Dual voice number and name Press the button a second time to turn the dual voice function off. A suitable dual voice is automatically selected when you turn on this function, but you can easily select a different dual voice (page 73). 20 Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT Once you press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button to turn the split function on, you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split point is known as the “split voice”. The currently selected split voice name and number will be displayed in the MAIN display. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 80). Split voice Quick Guide Split point Main voice and dual voice Split voice number and name Press the button a second time to turn the split voice function off. A suitable split voice is automatically selected when you turn on this function, but you can easily select a different split voice (page 73). Owner’s Manual 21 The Metronome The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play and set the tempo that is most comfortable for you. Start the Metronome Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again. Current setting Quick Guide Indicates the beat number in the measure Adjusting the Metronome Tempo 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo setting. Tempo 2 22 Use the dial to select a tempo from 5 to 280. Owner’s Manual The Metronome Setting the Time Signature In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature. Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to select the function “Time Signature–Numerator”. Hold for longer than a second 2 Numerator (Number of beats per measure.) Denominator (The length of one beat.) Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure. The available range is from 1 through 60. Select 5 for this example. A bell accent will be sounded at the first beat of each measure. 3 Press the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons as many times as necessary to select the beat length function “Time Signature–Denominator”. 4 Use the dial to select the beat length. Quick Guide 1 NOTE • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th note). Select 8 for this example. Owner’s Manual 23 Playing Styles This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 165 different styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures. In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features. Select a Style Rhythm Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played using percussion instruments only. Quick Guide 1 Press the [STYLE] button. The style select display will appear. The currently selected style number and name will be highlighted. The currently selected style 24 2 Select a style. Use the dial to select the style you want to use. A list of all the available styles is provided in the Style List of the separate Data List. NOTE 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. NOTE The style rhythm will start playing. Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback. Owner’s Manual • You can also use the style files provided on the supplied CD-ROM (page 102). • The “Serenade” style in the Waltz category and all styles in the Pianist category have no rhythm part and therefore no rhythm will play if you use them for the above example. For these styles first turn auto accompaniment on as described on page 25, press the [START/STOP] button, and the accompaniment bass and chord parts will begin playing when you play a key to the left of the keyboard split point. Playing Styles Play Along with a Style You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page. Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with. 1 Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style. For this example select the “153 PianoBoogie” style. Turn automatic accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off. Quick Guide 2 This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. When automatic accompaniment is on ... The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54: F#2) becomes the “auto accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the accompaniment chords. Split point (54: F#2) Auto accompaniment range 3 Turn sync start on. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on. Flashes when sync start is on. When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function off. Owner’s Manual 25 Playing Styles 4 Start playing. Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Try playing the chord progression shown below. The accompaniment will change according to the lefthand notes you play. NOTE • Chords (page 27) • Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary (page 82) Split point Auto accompaniment range Quick Guide C F C G F C This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords! Indicates the chord currently being played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. 5 Stop playing. Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback when you’re done. NOTE • You can also stop playing by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button so that an appropriate ending pattern will play and then style playback will stop. NOTE • You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment. Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 76. 26 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Chords For users who are new to chords, this chart features common chords. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.  indicates the root note. Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh C Cm C7 Cm7 CM 7 D Dm D7 Dm7 DM 7 E Em E7 Em7 EM7 C F Fm F7 Fm7 FM7 G Gm G7 Gm7 GM7 A Am A7 Am7 AM 7 B Bm B7 Bm 7 BM 7 Quick Guide Major • A wide variety of chord types can be recognized as well as the above chord types. • Depending on the chord type, inversions can be used as well as in “root” position. • Some chord types may not be recognized if some notes are omitted. Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. For root “C” C To play a major chord Press the root note () of the chord. Cm To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. C7 To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. Cm 7 To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). AI Finger By changing the chord fingering type to “AI Fingered”, you can automatically produce appropriate accompaniment even if you don’t press all of the notes which comprise a chord. (pages 81 and 87) Owner’s Manual 27 Playing Songs With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs, or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The songs are organized by category. In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly describe the 30 songs provided. Select and Listen to a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button. The song selection display will appear. The currently selected song number and name will be highlighted. Quick Guide The currently selected song number and name 2 Select a song. Select a song after referring to the Song List in the separate Data List. Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to. The song highlighted here can be played 28 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You can also play songs you have recorded yourself (User Songs) or songs that have been transferred to the instrument from a computer in the same way that you play the internal songs. Playing Songs The songs are organized by category. • The songs in this category have been created to give you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument. • These songs features some of the instrument’s many useful voices. • Use these songs to experience some of the instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the performance assistant technology feature. • These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as lesson songs. • A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also well suited for use as lesson songs. • When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to do it with. • Songs you record yourself. 3 Quick Guide • Songs stored on a USB flash memory plugged into the instrument, or songs transferred from a computer (pages 30 and 99). Listen to the song. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button again. The red lamp lights on the first beat of every measure when a song is playing.The other beats are indicated with a green light. NOTE • Score data for the 30 internal songs are provided in the Songbook on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs 1 to 11 and 30. The scores for songs 9 to 11 are provided in the separate Data List. Owner’s Manual 29 Playing Songs Select and Play Songs on a USB Flash Memory MIDI songs stored on a USB flash memory connected to the instrument can be directly selected and played. Quick Guide The procedure is exactly the same as that for selecting internal songs (page 28). Songs on a USB flash memory are numbered from 36 upward, so all you need to do is select song number 36 or higher. Song File Can be selected/played. Song File Song File Cannot be selected/played. Song Title Display Language File names containing Japanese characters will be properly displayed if the instrument’s display language is set to “Japanese” (page 71). 30 Owner’s Manual • Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal (page 91) IMPORTANT USB flash memory (Root) Song File NOTE • In order to play data copied to a USB flash memory from a computer or other device, the data must be stored either in the USB flash memory’s root directory or a firstlevel/second-level folder in the root directory. Data stored in third-level-folders created inside a secondlevel folder cannot be selected and played by this instrument. Playing Songs Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF], rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song. REW Press the fast reverse button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the song. FF Press the fast forward button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the song. Quick Guide When lit the functions indicated by the labels above the buttons can be used. PAUSE Press the pause button to pause playback. Play the Demo Song Press the [DEMO/BGM] button. The demo song will start playing. Listen to some of the outstanding instrument voices provided! The demo song will automatically repeat from the beginning after it has played all the way through. You can stop demo playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO/BGM] button or [START/STOP] button. With the default setting only one demo song is played back and repeated when the [DEMO/BGM] button is pressed. This setting can be changed so that all internal songs are played, or all songs transferred to the instrument from a computer are played. Five playback group settings are provided. Simply select the one that suits your needs. (page 85) Owner’s Manual 31 Playing Songs Displaying the Song Score This instrument is capable of display the scores of songs. Scores are displayed for the 30 internal preset songs as well as songs in SMF format stored in a USB flash memory or the instrument’s internal flash memory. 1 2 Select a song. Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 28. Press the [SCORE] button and a single-staff score will appear. Quick Guide There are two types of score display: single-staff and double-staff. These are alternately selected each time the [SCORE] button is pressed. Single-staff Marker Melody score Chord NOTE • Both chords and lyrics will be shown in single-staff score display of a song that includes chord and lyric data. • When there are many lyrics they may be displayed in two rows a measure. • Some lyrics or chords may be abbreviated if the selected song has a lot of lyrics. • Small notes that are hard to read may be easier to read after you use the quantize function (page 88). Lyrics NOTE • No chords or lyrics are shown on the double-staff. Double-staff NOTE 32 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. 4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. The song will begin playing. The triangular will move across the top of the score to indicate the current location. Owner’s Manual • If the song volume is turned all the way down at this point you will be able to hear only the sound of your own performance so that you can play the song yourself while reading the score. Refer to page 83 for the song volume adjustment procedure. Playing Songs Display the Lyrics If a song contains lyric data, the lyrics can be made to appear on the display. No lyrics will be displayed for a song that contains no lyric data even if the [LYRICS] button is pressed. Select a song. 2 Press the [LYRICS] button. NOTE Select a song 16 by performing steps 1 and 2 described on page 28. Internal song number 16 is the only internal song that provides lyric display. The title, lyricist, and composer of the song will appear on the display. • Songs downloaded from the Internet or commercially available song files, including XF format files (page 6), are compatible with the lyrics display features as long as they are standard MIDI file format files containing lyric data. Lyrics display may not be possible with some files. Quick Guide 1 NOTE Song title, lyricist, and composer. 3 • If the lyrics display shows garbled characters, try changing the display language (page 71). Press the [START/STOP] button. The song will play back while the lyrics and chords are shown on the display. The lyrics will be highlighted to show the current location in the song. Lyrics and chord display Owner’s Manual 33 Basic Operation Reference Basic Operation Overall DGX-640 control is based on the following simple operations. 1 Press a button to select a basic function. 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. 3 Start a function. 3 Start a function. 1 Select a basic function. 2 Select an item or value. Display (pages 36–37) Volume Adjustment Reference Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones plugged into the PHONES jack. 1 Rotate counterclockwise to lower the volume. Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. Press a button to select a basic function. Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard. Select an auto-accompaniment style. Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson. 34 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be listed in the display. You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item. The currently selected item is highlighted in the display. In this example the [VOICE] button has been pressed. Changing Values Decrease [+] and [-] Buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increment the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrement the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increment or Press briefly decrement the value in the to decrement. corresponding direction. Increase CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons When selecting a song, style, or voice, you can use these buttons to jump to the first item in the next or previous category. Jump to the first item in the next or previThe CATEGORY [r] and ous category. [f] buttons are useful for selecting categorized items, as in the example below. Example: VOICE SELECT Display CATEGORY button [r] mark. Select the category shown here. Press briefly to increment. Number Buttons [0]–[9] The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number or parameter value. Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below). Example: Song number “003” can be entered in three ways. • [0]  [0]  [3] • [0]  [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) • [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) CATEGORY button [f] mark. The first voice in the selected category is selected. Reference Dial Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value of the selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial continuously to continuously increase or decrease the value. In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you first use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when you have to select from a large number of voices. In most procedures described throughout this owner’s manual the dial is recommended for selection simply because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection method. Please note however, that most items or values that can be selected using the dial can also be selected using the [+] and [-] buttons. Press number buttons [0], [0], [3]. 3 Start a function. This is the [START/STOP] button. Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm). Owner’s Manual 35 Basic Operation The Displays Display Names All operations are carried out while watching the display. A number of display types are provided for different modes and functions. The name of the current display appears at the top of the display. MAIN Display Title To Return To the MAIN Display Most basic operations are carried out from the instrument’s MAIN display. You can return to the MAIN display from any other display by pressing the [EXIT] button near the lower right corner of the display panel. FUNCTION Display Reference The FUNCTION display provides access to 53 utility functions (page 86). The FUNCTION display appears when the [FUNCTION] button is pressed. In the FUNCTION display you can use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select 53 different groups of functions. Press the CATEGORY button(s) as many times as necessary until the required function appears. You can then use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the number [0]–[9] buttons to adjust the value of the function as required. Function item Value The “Press & Hold” Symbol The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a range of functions. 36 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation MAIN Display Items The MAIN display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions. * Adjust the LCD CONTRAST control on the rear panel of the instrument for optimum display legibility. A-B Repeat Tempo Appears when repeat playback is engaged. Measure Number Transpose Voice: Main (page 18) Dual (page 20) Split (page 21) Song (page 28) Style (page 24) MDB (page 53) Function ON/Off Icons Chord Display Performance assistant technology Appears when the performance assistant technology is on. Appears when auto accompaniment is on. Appears when the synchrostop function is engaged. The style pattern name. Registration Memory Status Shows the selected bank number. Shows the memory numbers that contain data. A border appears around the selected number. Harmony Appears when Harmony is on. When this icon is showing harmony notes will be added to the main voice. Reference Style (Auto-accompaniment) Status DSP Appears when DSP is on. Song Track Status Highlighted during user song recording. A border is off when track is muted. Owner’s Manual 37 Select a Song For a Lesson Yamaha Education Suite You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle. It’s never too late to start learning! The practice methods: Lesson 1—Waiting  Learn to play the correct notes. Lesson 2—Your Tempo  Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Lesson 3—Minus One  Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song. Lesson 1—Waiting In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you play the right note. 1 2 Select a song for your lesson. Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category! For this example try selecting the “012 For Elise”. Press [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • Song numbers 10 and 11 are function demos for performance assistant. The lesson function cannot be used with them. Reference • You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from the computer and saved to flash memory. (page 100) 3 Turn off playback of the part you wish to practice. The preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts. You can turn the leftand right-hand parts on or off as required in order to practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by the [R/1] button and the left-hand part is played by the [L/2] button. Owner’s Manual NOTE • You can turn parts on or off, even during playback. Right-hand lesson (R part is off) Left-hand lesson (L part is off) Both-hands lesson (R and L parts are off) Pressing the part buttons [R/1] and [L/2] toggles part playback on and off. Turn off playback of the part you wish to practice. When you first select a song, both “1” and “2” indicators with borders light up, indicating that both parts are on. When you press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the border around the corresponding part indicator disappears and the corresponding part playback is muted. 38 • You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) on a USB flash memory. (page 30) Select a Song For a Lesson 4 Start Lesson 1. Press the [Waiting] button to start Lesson 1. Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1. Play the notes shown in the on-screen score. The next note to be played is indicated by a dot () on the appropriate key of the graphic on-screen keyboard. When you play the correct note the marker will move to the next key to be played. Playback will pause and wait for you to play the correct note. The triangular marker () above the score indicates playback progress.  Marker  Marker Shifting the keyboard left or right. Reference The hidden ( ) areas of the keyboard can be brought into view by pressing the [+] or [-] button The displayed range (61 keys) Actual keyboard range (DGX-640 = 88 keys) 61 keys of the keyboard’s range are shown on the display. The DGX-640 actually have 88 keys. In some songs that include very high or low notes, those notes may fall outside the displayed range and may not be shown on the display. In such cases an “over” indicator appear to the left or right of the graphic keyboard. Use the [+] or [-] button to shift the keyboard left or right so you can see the notes (the  marker will appear on the appropriate key in the display). Notes that actually fall outside the keyboard’s range cannot be used in the lesson. 5 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Owner’s Manual 39 Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 2—Your Tempo Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 3 on page 38). 2 Start Lesson 2. Press the [YOUR TEMPO] button to start Lesson 2. Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected. The triangular marker will appear in the score display, and will move to indicate the current note in the song. Try to play the notes at the correct timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original tempo. Play while following the score marker Reference 3 40 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Owner’s Manual Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 3—Minus One Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 3 on page 38). 2 Start Lesson 3. Press the [Minus One] button to start Lesson 3. Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected. Play along while listening to the song. The score marker and keyboard marker in the display will indicate the notes to play. Reference  Marker  Marker 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Owner’s Manual 41 Select a Song For a Lesson NOTE See How You’ve Done When the lesson song has played all the way through your performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation. • The evaluation feature can be turned off via the FUNCTION Grade item (page 88). After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. Press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button during a lesson. The song location will move back four measures from the point at which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-measure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you pressed the [REPEAT & LEARN] button, and then jump back four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all you have to do is press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it right. Press the button again to return to the normal lesson mode. Reference 42 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You can change the number of measures the Repeat and learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] during repeat playback. The Easy Way to Play Piano This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any notes and still sound good! You could even just tap one key and the results would be a beautiful melody. So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun. Performance assistant technology offers four selectable types. Select the type that produces the best results for you.  Chord........................... No matter where or what you play, the result will be musical, well-balanced sound. This type offers the greatest freedom, allowing you to play anything with both your left and right hands.  Chord/Free .................If you can play simple right-hand melodies but have trouble with left-hand chords, this is the type for you. The Chord type applies to only the left-hand section of the keyboard, allowing you to easily play chords to support the melody you are playing with your right hand.  Melody.........................This type lets you play the melody of the selected song by playing any keys with just one finger. Start playing melodies right away, even if you’ve never played a keyboard instrument before!  Chord/Melody............Play the melody of the selected song with one finger on the right-hand section of the keyboard, and play chords on the left-hand section of the keyboard using the Chord type. Reference To use the performance assistant technology feature it is necessary to play a song that includes the required chord and/or melody data. When the Chord and Chord/Free type is selected the performance assistant technology can only be used with songs that include chord data. When the Melody type is selected the performance assistant technology will only work with songs that include melody data. When the Chord/Melody type is selected the performance assistant technology can only be used with songs that include chord and melody data. In order to find out if a song includes the required chord data, refer to the Song List in the separate Data List document. Refer to page 52 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play. Owner’s Manual 43 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands Try out the performance assistant technology using the preset song “Ave Maria.” 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the performance assistant technology feature is on. The currently selected type 2 Select the CHORD type. Select Chord Hold for longer than a second Reference Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. For this example try selecting the “010 Ave Maria”. When the Chord type is selected, features only available for this song can be seen in the display! 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will play repeatedly. Listen to the basic pattern for four measures while getting a feel for the basic pattern, then begin playing yourself from the fifth measure. The keys you should play will be shown in the display. 44 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Select and Listen to a Song (page 28) The Easy Way to Play Piano 5 Play on the keyboard. Before After Try playing the score on the left with both hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. You’ll notice that at measure five the notes will come out according to the score on the right. Keep playing, and performance assistant technology Chord type will continue to “correct” the notes that you play. This is the performance assistant technology Chord type. NOTE • The score for Ave Maria is provided in the separate Data List. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. “...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type is normally shown. Reference 6 Next try playing a different preset song. Owner’s Manual 45 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD/FREE Type—Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only Try out the performance assistant technology using the preset song “Nocturne.” 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the performance assistant technology feature is on. The currently selected type 2 Select the CHORD/FREE type. Select Chord/Free Reference Hold for longer than a second Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord/Free type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. For this example try selecting the “011 Nocturne”. 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The left-hand keys you should play will be shown on the display. 46 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Select and Listen to a Song (page 28) The Easy Way to Play Piano 5 Play on the keyboard. Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of the split point with your left hand. Split point With this type notes played on the left-hand side of the split point will actually sound an octave higher. Play the Nocturne melody with your right hand. Continually play an F-A-C arpeggio with your left hand as indicated by the score shown in the display. Although you’re repeatedly playing the same notes with your left hand, the actual notes produced will change to match the music. This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Free type. NOTE • The score for Nocturne is provided in the separate Data List. Press the [SCORE] button if you want to see the score for the right-hand part in the display. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. “...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type is normally shown. Reference 6 Next try playing a different preset song. Owner’s Manual 47 The Easy Way to Play Piano MELODY Type—Play with One Finger 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the performance assistant technology feature is on. The currently selected type 2 Select the MELODY type. Select Melody Hold for longer than a second Reference Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Melody type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. For this example try selecting the “012 For Elise”. NOTE 4 Display the score. Press the [SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display. NOTE 5 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. Because the Melody type has been selected, the song melody will not sound. You can enjoy playing the melody yourself. 48 Owner’s Manual • Select and Listen to a Song (page 28) • Displaying the Song Score (page 32) The Easy Way to Play Piano 6 Play on the keyboard. The marker will indicate the current position in the score during playback. If you play a key each time the marker appears above a note in the score you will be able to play the melody with the correct “original” rhythm. Appears when the performance assistant technology is on  Marker Sounds like a melody! How does it sound? You’ve played the melody using only one finger thanks to the performance assistant technology Melody type! 7 Reference You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. “...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type is normally shown. Next try playing a different preset song. Owner’s Manual 49 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD/MELODY—Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the performance assistant technology feature is on. The currently selected type 2 Select the CHORD/MELODY type. Select Chord/Melody Hold for longer than a second Reference Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord/Melody type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. For this example try selecting the “023 Rock Piano”. NOTE 4 Display the score. Press the [SCORE] button twice to call up the double-staff score in the display. NOTE 5 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. Because the Melody type has been selected, the song melody will not sound. You can enjoy playing the melody yourself. 50 Owner’s Manual • Select and Listen to a Song (page 28) • Displaying the Song Score (page 32) The Easy Way to Play Piano 6 Play on the keyboard. Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of the split point with your left hand. Appears when the performance assistant technology is on  Marker Split point With this type notes played on the left-hand side of the split point will actually sound an octave higher. 7 Reference Play along with the rhythm of the song melody with your right hand. You can play any keys as long as you’re playing to the right of the split point. At the same time play accompaniment-like chords and phrases with your left hand. No matter what you play, you’ll produce the song melody with your right hand and beautiful chords and phrases with your left hand. This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Melody type. Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. “...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type is normally shown. Next try playing a different preset song. Owner’s Manual 51 The Easy Way to Play Piano Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro! Here are a few hints for using the Chord type. If you select Chord/Free or Chord/Melody, the left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the Chord type section, so use these hints on the left-hand section of the keyboard. To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately with your left and right hands (any notes will do). The chord information included in the song is displayed in the lower area of the MAIN display. You will get even better results if you match your left-hand rhythm to rhythm of the chord indicator in the display. Sounds like you’re playing the right notes! How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you play thanks to the performance assistant technology Chord type! Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of playing produce different results. Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 1. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 2. Play alternately with the left and right hands—type 3. Play 1 note at a time with your right hand (for example: index finger  middle finger  ring finger). Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. Reference Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a melody with your right ... or any other combination. External Songs and the performance assistant technology Songs downloaded from the Internet can also be used with the performance assistant technology as long as they include the required chord and/or melody data. Chord data 52 Owner’s Manual Play Using the Music Database You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. A Music Database list will appear in the display. Select a Music Database. Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List in the separate Data List, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song you intend to play. 3 Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. The style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the split point. Refer to pages 26–27 for information about playing chords. NOTE • Music Database (MDB) files transferred from a computer or stored on a USB flash memory device connected to the instrument can be selected and used in the same way as the internal Music Databases (MDB numbers 306–). File transfer instructions are provided on page 100. Reference 2 Split Point If you press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display at this point you can check the assigned voice and style. 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. Owner’s Manual 53 Change a Song’s Style In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by changing the style with which a song is played. You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for a complete change of image. Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger The “Hallelujah Chorus” in the preset songs lets you experience the Easy Song Arranger. Playing it. Press the [SONG] button and use the dial to select “009 Hallelujah Chorus.” Press the [START/STOP] button begin playback of the song. An explanation of the Easy Song Arranger feature will appear on the display. As the song progresses the styles will change, changing the overall image of the song. Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other songs as well—any songs that include chord data. NOTE • The score for Hallelujah Chorus is provided in the separate Data List. Using the Easy Song Arranger Try switching styles while the song plays back. 1 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button from the MAIN display. The EASY SONG ARRANGER MAIN display will appear. The currently selected song name and number will be highlighted. Reference The currently selected song number and name are displayed here. 2 Select a Song. Press the [SONG] button and then rotate the dial to select the song you want to arrange. Select the songs that include the required chord data referring to the Song List in the separate Data List. NOTE 3 54 Listen to the song. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move on to the next step while the song is playing. Owner’s Manual • When playing song numbers 010 and 021 to 030 while using the Easy Song Arranger, melody tracks will be automatically muted and no melody will sound. In order to hear the melody tracks you will need to press the SONG MEMORY buttons [3] to [5]. Change a Song’s Style 4 Select a style. Press the [STYLE] button and then rotate the dial to hear how the song sounds with different styles. As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only the styles change. 5 Changing a song melody voice. If you press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second a voice list will appear. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button. NOTE • Because the Easy Song Arranger uses song data you can’t specify chords by playing in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/ OFF] button will not function. • If the time signature of the song and style are different, the time signature of the song will be used. Hold for longer than a second Reference The currently selected melody voice will be displayed. Use the dial to change the melody voice. As you select different melody voices the song will remain the same while only the melody voice changes. 6 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button to turn the function off. If the song or style is being played back, first stop the playback, then turn the Easy Song Arranger function off. NOTE • If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button during style playback, the style will stop but the song will continue playing. Use the [START/ STOP] button to stop playback completely. Owner’s Manual 55 Record Your Own Performance You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as user songs 031 through 035. Once your performances have been saved as user songs they can be played in the same way as the internal songs. User songs can also be saved to a USB flash memory device, as described on page 94. Recording 1 Press the [REC] button. NOTICE • If all User Songs (Song numbers 031–035) contain recorded data, Song 031 will automatically be selected. In this case, you will record over and erase any previous data in Song 031, so be careful that you won’t be erasing any material you want to keep! Flashes when record mode is on. NOTE The lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song (Song numbers 031–035) available for recording is displayed. If you want to select the Song you will be recording, select the desired Song number by using the dial. Track 1 is automatically selected You can turn off the Record mode by pressing the [REC] button again or [EXIT] button (The [START/STOP] button indicator stop flashing). Reference 2 Start recording. When you play the keyboard, recording will begin. 3 Stop recording. Press the [REC] button or [START/STOP] button to stop the recording. 4 Save the song. When recording is stopped a message asking if you want to save the song will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to save the song, or the [-/NO] button if you don’t want to save the song. If saved, the song will be stored as a MIDI file in song number 031–035. To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button. 56 Owner’s Manual • Accompaniment cannot be turned on or off once the [REC] button is pressed. NOTE • After you’ve selected the desired User Song for recording, you can select a Style to be recorded as well. To do this, press the [STYLE] button and select the Style number while the ACMP indication is on. NOTICE • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. Record Your Own Performance Recording to a specified track Recordable Data You can record up to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track. Each track can be recorded individually.  SONG MEMORY (Track) [1]–[5] .. Record the melody parts.  SONG MEMORY (Track) [A]........ Records the style pattern and chord parts. Melody Chords NOTE • Up to approximately 30,000 notes can be recorded for the five user songs if you record only to the melody tracks. • User songs are saved as SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 0 files. Refer to page 108 for information on SMF files. Specify track(s) and record Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Style Track Track Mute This instrument allows you to choose whether recorded tracks will play back while you are recording or playing back other tracks (page 84). From the MAIN display press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you want to record to. Reference 1 Rotate the dial to select a song number between 031 and 035. 2 Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your selection on the display. NOTICE  Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track Together • If you record to track that Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the contains previously[REC] button. recorded data the previous data will be overwritten Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button. and lost. The selected tracks will be highlighted in the display. NOTE Track 1 and Style track will be highlighted Press and hold • Style accompaniment is automatically turned on when you select the style track [A] for recording. • Style accompaniment cannot turned on or off while recording is in progress. Owner’s Manual 57 Record Your Own Performance  Record a Melody track Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. Select button [1]–[3] if you want to record a dual voice. Split voices cannot be recorded. The selected track will be highlighted in the display. Track 1 will be highlighted NOTE • If style accompaniment is on and track [A] has not yet been recorded, the style track [A] will automatically be selected for recording when a melody track is selected. If you only want to record a melody track, be sure to turn the style track [A] off. To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a second time. 3 Recording will start when you play on the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. The current measure will be shown on the display during recording. Recording starts NOTE • If the memory becomes full during recording a warning message will appear and recording will stop automatically. Use the song clear or track clear (pages 60–61) function to delete unwanted data and make more room available for recording, then do the recording again. NOTE Current measure Reference 4 Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC] button. or When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will be shown in a box border. 58 Owner’s Manual • If you want to record only the rhythm (percussion) part, press the [START/STOP] button to play just the rhythm, then add the section change by pressing the [INTO/ENDING/rit.] button or [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. NOTE • If you press the [INTRO/ ENDING/rit.] button while recording a style track, an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will stop. Record Your Own Performance 5 Save the song. When recording is stopped a message asking if you want to save the song will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to save the song, or the [-/NO] button if you don’t want to save the song. If saved, the song will be stored as a MIDI file in song number 031–035. NOTICE • The recorded Song data will be lost if you turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. If you press the [-/NO] button in response to the confirmation message the song will not be saved as a MIDI file but will remain in the instrument’s memory until the power is turned off, so you have the option of converting the song to a MIDI file and saving it later. To do this press and hold the [REC] button until the save confirmation message appears, then press the [+/YES] button. To Record Other Tracks Repeat steps 2 through 5 to record any of the remaining tracks. By selecting an unrecorded track—track buttons [1]–[5], [A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded tracks (the border around the track number will appear in the display). You can also mute previously recorded tracks (the border around the track number disappears in the display) while recording new tracks. 6 Reference To Re-record a Track Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal way. The new material will overwrite the previous data. When the recording is done ... To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button.  To Play Back a User Song User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 28).  To save a User Song to USB flash memory  page 94. Data that cannot be recorded • Split voice • The following items are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes made during the song will not be recorded. Time signature, Style number, Style volume Owner’s Manual 59 Record Your Own Performance Song Clear—Deleting User Songs NOTE This function clears an entire user song (all tracks). 1 From the MAIN display select the user song (031–035) you want to clear. 2 Press and hold the track [1] button for longer than a second while holding the track [A] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the [+] button to clear the song. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the song is being cleared. Reference 60 Press and hold Owner’s Manual • If you only want to clear a specific track from a user song use the Track Clear function. Record Your Own Performance Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song. 1 From the MAIN display select the user song (031–035) you want to clear. 2 Press and hold the track button ([1]–[5], [A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. Hold for longer than a second Press the [+] button to clear the track. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the track is being cleared. Reference 3 Owner’s Manual 61 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 32 complete setups can be saved (8 banks of four setups each). 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4 Up to 32 presets (eight banks of four each) can be memorized. Saving to the Registration Memory 1 Set the panel controls as required—select a voice, accompaniment style, etc. 2 Press the [BANK] button. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. Bank number Reference 3 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select a bank number from 1 to 8. 4 Press one of the REGIST MEMORY buttons [1] to [4] while holding the [BANK] button to store the current panel settings to the specified registration memory. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display in order to check the bank and registration memory numbers. NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song playback. NOTE • You can also save your panel settings memorized to registration memory button into USB flash memory as the user file or to a computer as the backup file. NOTE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. NOTICE Bank number 62 Owner’s Manual • Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registration memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings Recalling a Registration Memory 1 Press the [BANK] button. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. Bank number 2 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select bank you want to recall. You can check whether the panel settings are stored in registration memory 1–4 by pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Press one of the REGIST MEMORY buttons [1] to [4] containing the settings you want to recall. The panel controls will be instantly set accordingly. Reference 3 Settings That Can be Saved to the Registration Memory Style settings* Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF, Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo, Chord Fingering Voice settings Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level), Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level) Effect settings Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain ON/OFF, DSP ON/OFF, DSP Type Harmony settings Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume Other settings Transpose, Pitch Bend Range * Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song features. Owner’s Manual 63 Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation “Backup Clear” as explained below. The Backup Parameters • Registration Memory • FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Language Selection, Panel Sustain, Master EQ type, Chord Fingering NOTE • You can save the settings as backup data to your computer, by using the Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. Refer to the section “Transfer a backup file from the instrument to a computer” on page 101. Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. Backup Clear To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user setting, registration memory—turn the power on by pressing the [ ] (Standby/On) switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. Reference Initialization does not delete the files transferred from the computer. If you want to delete the files, see “Deleting Files” below. Deleting Files NOTICE To clear Song, Style, and Music Database files that have been transferred to the • When you execute the internal flash memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [ ] Flash Clear operation, data (Standby/On) switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyyou have purchased will also be cleared. Be sure to board and the three highest black keys. save data you want to keep to a computer. 64 Owner’s Manual Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Harmony This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn Harmony feature on. To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button again. 3 Use the dial to select a harmony type. Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List for information about the available harmony types. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different-refer to the below section “How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as the Effect Type List for details. NOTE • The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 01 to 10, 13 When harmony is on the harmony icon will appear in the display. • When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main voice is automatically selected. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY] button for longer than a second. The currently selected harmony type will be displayed. Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on. • Harmony type 15 to 18 (Echo) Reference NOTE Keep holding down the keys. • Harmony type 19 to 22 (Tremolo) Keep holding down the keys. Hold for longer than a second. • Harmony type 23 to 26 (Trill) Hold down two keys. You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 88). The currently selected harmony type Owner’s Manual 65 Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Reverb Adding Chorus Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List for information about the available reverb types. The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison. When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the Reverb Type item. The currently selected reverb type will be displayed. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the Chorus Type item. The currently selected chorus type will be displayed. Chorus Type item Reverb Type item Reference The currently selected chorus type. The currently selected reverb type. 3 Use the dial to select a reverb type. You can check how the selected reverb type sounds by playing on the keyboard. Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List for information about the available reverb types. 3 Use the dial to select a chorus type. You can check how the selected chorus type sounds by playing on the keyboard. Refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List for information about the available chorus types. Adjusting the Chorus Level Adjusting the Reverb Level You can individually adjust the amount of reverb that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 87). 66 Owner’s Manual You can individually adjust the amount of chorus that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 87). Play with a Variety of Effects Adding DSP DSP is term of abbreviated form of Digital Signal Processor. The DSP effect can be added to the Main and Dual Voices. These range from reverb-like ambience effects to distortion and other dynamic processing tools that let you enhance the sound, or completely transform it. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 3 Use the dial to turn DSP on or off. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display in order to check the DSP on/off status. NOTE • When DSP is turned on, the optimum DSP type for the current Voice is automatically selected. • The volume of the currently playing Voice changes when turning DSP on or off. This is not a malfunction. The amount of change differs depending on the selected Voice. • The DSP type is an overall setting–only one type can be selected. For this reason, when you play a newly loaded Song or Style, for example, the currently playing Voices may not sound as expected. This is normal, since the Song or Style has its own DSP type which replaces any selection you’ve made before loading. A similar phenomenon occurs when you use the [FF], [REW] buttons or A-B Repeat function during song playback. 4 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the DSP Type item. The currently selected DSP type will be displayed. 5 Use the dial to select a DSP type. Refer to the DSP Type List in the separate Data List for information about the available DSP types. Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the DSP ON/OFF item. The current setting is displayed. Reference 2 When DSP is on the DSP icon will appear in the display Adjusting the DSP Level You can individually adjust the amount of DSP that is applied to the main and dual voices. (See page 87). Owner’s Manual 67 Play with a Variety of Effects Panel Sustain Pitch Bend This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all times, regardless of footswitch operation. The sustain function does not affect split voice. The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by the wheel, as described on page 87. Reference 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the Sustain item. The current setting is displayed. 3 Use the dial to turn panel sustain on or off. NOTE • The sustain of some voices may not be markedly affected when the panel sustain function is turned on. 68 Owner’s Manual Play with a Variety of Effects Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. 2 Press the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons as many times as necessary to select the master EQ type function “Master EQ Type”. The currently selected EQ type will appear. 3 Use the dial to select the desired Master EQ setting. Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and 2 are best for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speakers. Reference 1 The currently selected master EQ type. Owner’s Manual 69 Handy Performance Features Tap Start Setting the Click bell sound You can start the song/style by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the tempo during song/ style playback by pressing the button just twice. This allows you to select whether the click sound has a bell accent, or plays only a click sound. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the Bell item. 3 You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons to turn the bell sound on or off. One Touch Setting Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select voice number “000” to activate this feature. Reference 70 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Adjusting the Metronome Volume Changing the Display Language 1 This instrument allows you to select English or Japanese as the display language. The default display language is English, but if you switch to Japanese the lyrics, file names, and some messages will be displayed in Japanese where appropriate. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the Metronome Volume item. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons a number of times until the “Language” item appears. The currently selected display language will appear below the “Language” item. When highlighted you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the language as required. Metronome volume Language item Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required. Reference 3 The currently selected language 3 Select a display language. The [+] button selects English and the [-] button selects Japanese. The language selection will be stored in the internal flash memory so that it is retained even when the power is turned off. Owner’s Manual 71 Voice Settings Voice Editing Create original voices by editing the many available voice parameters. By editing the various parameters available you can create new voices that best suit your musical needs. 1 Category Function Item Main Volume Main Octave -2–+2 Main Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Main Reverb Level 000–127 Main Chorus Level 000–127 MAIN VOICE Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. Main DSP Level 000–127 Dual Volume 000–127 Dual Octave -2–+2 Dual Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Dual Reverb Level 000–127 DUAL VOICE 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the item you want to edit. You can individually adjust the voice setting (Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level and DSP Level) that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. Refer to the Functions on page 87 for details. Reference 3 72 Use the dial to set the value. Edited parameters can be saved to registration memory. If you select a different keyboard voice the parameters will be reset and the ideal settings for the selected voice will be automatically recalled. Owner’s Manual SPLIT VOICE Range/Settings 000–127 Dual Chorus Level 000–127 Dual DSP Level 000–127 Split Volume 000–127 Split Octave -2–+2 Split Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Split Reverb Level 000–127 Split Chorus Level 000–127 Voice Settings Selecting a Dual Voice Selecting a Split Voice 1 1 Hold for longer than a second. 2 Select the desired dual voice. Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. The split voice selection display will appear. Hold for longer than a second. 2 Select the desired split voice. Watch the highlighted split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Owner’s Manual Reference Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. The dual voice selection display will appear. 73 Voice Settings Pitch Controls (Transpose) Pitch Controls (Tuning) The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone). 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the Transpose item. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the Tuning item. Reference 3 Transpose item Tuning item Can be set between -12 and +12 Can be set between -100 and +100 Use the dial to set the transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. 74 Owner’s Manual 3 Use the dial to set the tuning value between -100 and +100 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. Voice Settings Touch Response Sensitivity You can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the Touch Sensitivity item. The currently selected touch sensitivity will be displayed. 3 Use the dial to select a touch sensitivity setting between 1 and 3. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics —i.e. greater sensitivity. A setting of “4” results in a fixed touch response, or no level change no matter how hard or how soft you play the keys. NOTE • The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”. Reference Touch Sensitivity item Owner’s Manual 75 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 24 of the Quick Guide. Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment procedure, and more. Pattern Variation (Sections) The instrument features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. Intro Main A/B Ending Auto fill INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. MAIN section Reference This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. Fill-in section This is automatically added before changing to section A or B. ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. 76 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 1 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a style. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. The name of the selected section— MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed. 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Appears when auto accompaniment is on. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn synchro start on. The indicator will flash when the synchro start standby mode will be engaged. You’re now ready to play the intro. 6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Chords” on page 27. Reference 3 Split point Synchro Start When the synchro start standby mode is engaged, style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START] button again. Accompaniment range Owner’s Manual 77 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. Synchro Stop When this function is selected the accompaniment style will only play while you are playing chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Style playback will stop when you release the keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC STOP] button. When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section A/B. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. The style will play while you are playing the keys Reference This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. 78 Owner’s Manual Style playback will stop when you release the keys Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Changing the tempo of the Style Adjusting the Style Volume Styles can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow. Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function. 1 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the Style Volume item. 3 Use the dial to set the style volume between 000 and 127. Use the dial to select a tempo from 011 to 280 quarter-note beats per minute. Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo of a Style. Reference 2 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in the display after selecting a Style. You can change the tempo during style playback by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice. Owner’s Manual 79 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Setting the Split Point The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the Split point item. 3 Use the dial to set the split point to any key from 021(A-1) through 108 (C7). Reference Split point (54 : F#2) Split voice • When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point also changes. • The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson. • The split voice sounds when the split-point key is played. Owner’s Manual When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the instrument can be used. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on after pressing the [STYLE] button. Appears when auto accompaniment is on Main voice NOTE 80 Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) Accompaniment range Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions AI Fingered Less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 2 Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to select the function “Chord Fingering”. In this mode Easy Chords cannot be detected. In “Play Along with a Style” on page 25 we described a method of playing styles in which chords were detected only to the left of the keyboard split point. By making the settings described below, however, chord detection for style accompaniment occurs over the entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even more dynamic style performance. In this mode Easy Chords cannot be detected. 1 Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to select the function “Chord Fingering”. 2 Use the dial to select 2 “FullKeyboard”. Use the dial to select 3 “AI Fingered”. Reference 1 Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard To reset the chord fingering to default setting, select 1 “Multi Finger”. To reset the chord fingering to default setting, select 1 “Multi Finger”. Owner’s Manual 81 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the [MINUS ONE] button for longer than a second. 3 Hold for longer than a second. Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard labeled “CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Notation of chord 2 Reference As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Chord name (root and type) Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. • Be aware that the chord types explained here are the left-hand notes applied to various styles and different from the one for the performance assistant technology feature. 4 82 Owner’s Manual Try playing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flash. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Song Settings Changing the tempo of the Song Song Volume Songs can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the Song Volume item. 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in the display after selecting a Song. Song volume item Current Tempo value Use the dial to select a tempo from 011 to 280 quarter-note beats per minute. Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo of a Song. You can change the tempo during song playback by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice. Can be set between 000 and 127 3 Use the dial to set the song volume between 000 and 127. Reference 2 NOTE • Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected. Owner’s Manual 83 Song Settings A-B Repeat Muting Independent Song Tracks You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. You can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. To mute a track, press the appropriate track button (TRACK [1]–[5], [A]) button. Press the same button a second time to disengage track muting. A 1 B Play the song and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). Track number with border ... track contains data and is not muted. No track number ... no data. Track number without border ... track contains data but is muted. 2 Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). Change the Melody Voice Reference You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer. 3 The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button. NOTE • Repeat start and end points cannot be specified within the same measure While the song is stopped. • The current measure number is shown in the display during playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song. 84 Owner’s Manual Press the [VOICE] button for longer than a second during the song playback. The VOICE SELECT (MELODY R or MELODY L) display will appear so you can select the Melody R or Melody L voice. Pressing the [VOICE] button alternates between VOICE SELECT MELODY R and MELODY L. Use the dial to select the voice. As you select different melody voices, only the melody voice changes while the song will remain the same. Song Settings BGM Playback Random Song Playback With the default setting only one demo song is played back and repeated when the [DEMO/BGM] button is pressed. This setting can be changed so that all internal songs, all songs transferred to the instrument from a computer, or all MIDI songs on a USB flash memory connected to the instrument are played. Five playback group settings are provided. Simply select the one that suits your needs. The random play mode causes the songs in the group selected for BGM playback to be played back in random order. 1 Press and hold the [DEMO/BGM] button for longer than a second to call up the “Demo Group” selection display. The currently selected repeat playback target will appear. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons as many times as necessary to select “Demo Play Mode”. The currently selected repeat playback mode will appear. You cannot select the repeat playback mode when “Demo” is selected as the repeat playback group. 3 Use the dial to select “Random”. If you want to restore the normal playback mode, select “Normal”. 2 Use the dial to select a repeat playback group from the table below. Demo Demo Song Preset All preset songs User All User songs Download All songs transferred from a computer USB All songs stored on a USB flash memory connected to the instrument. Owner’s Manual Reference Hold for longer than a second. 85 The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tuning, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the function list starting on the opposite page. There are 53 function parameters in all. When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display name and adjust as required. Selecting and Setting Functions 1 Find the function you want to set in the list that begins on page 87. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 4 Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the selected function as required. The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF. In some cases the [+] button will initiate execution of the selected function, and the [-] will cancel the selection. Direct numeric entry. Reference 3 Select a function. Press the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons as many times as necessary until the function’s display name appears in the display. Next item The selected function Value 86 Owner’s Manual Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. • Increment value by 1. • ON • Execute Some Function settings are stored in memory as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on page 64 for information on the function settings that are stored on the instrument. To restore all initial factor default settings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure described in the “Initialization” section on page 64. Function category Previous item • Decrement value by 1. • OFF • Cancel The Functions Function Setting List Category Function Item Range/Settings Description Style Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style. Song Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song. Transpose -12–+12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments. Tuning -100–+100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments. Pitch Bend Range 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments. Split Point 021(A-1)–108(C7) Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. Touch Sensitivity 1(Soft), 2(Medium), 3(Hard), 4(Off) Determines the sensitivity of the feature. Chord Fingering 1(Multi Finger), 2(FullKeyboard), 3(AI Fingered) Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode both normal chords and simple chords played to the left of the split point are detected. In the Full Keyboard mode normal chords played anywhere on the keyboard will be detected, and the notes played will be sound as well. In the AI Fingered mode, less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). Main Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice. OVERALL Main Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice. Main Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Main Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. MAIN VOICE Main Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Main DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Dual Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice. Dual Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Dual Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Dual Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Dual Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Dual DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Split Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice. Split Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice. Split Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Split Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Split Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. DUAL VOICE SPLIT VOICE Owner’s Manual Reference VOLUME 87 The Functions Category Function Item Range/Settings Description Reverb Type 01–36 Determines the Reverb type, including off. Chorus Type 1–45 Determines the Chorus type, including off. DSP ON/OFF ON/OFF Determines whether the DSP effect is on or off. DSP Type 001–239 Determines the DSP type. Sustain ON/OFF Determines whether or not panel sustain is always applied to the MAIN/ DUAL voices. Panel sustain is applied continuously when ON, or not applied when OFF. Master EQ Type 1(Speaker 1), 2(Speaker 2), 3(Headphones), 4(Line Out 1), 5(Line Out 2) Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. Harmony Type 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. Harmony Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. PAT P.A.T. Type CHORD, CHORD/FREE, MELODY, CHORD/MELODY Determines the performance assistant technology feature type. PC PC Mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer. Local ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). External Clock ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). Keyboard Out ON/OFF Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Song playback. Initial Setup YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to send, or press [-] to cancel. Time Signature Numerator 01–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Time Signature Denominator 2, 4, 8, 16 Sets the length of each metronome beat. Bell ON/OFF Determines whether a bell accent will be sounded (ON) or not (OFF). Metronome Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Quantize 1(1/4 note), 2(1/4 note triplet), 3(1/8 note), 4(1/8 note triplet), 5(1/16 note), 6(1/16 note triplet), 7(1/32 note), 8(1/32 note triplet) Depending on the song data, you can make the score more readable by adjusting the timing of the notes. This determines the minimum timing resolution used in the song. For example, if there are both quarter notes and eighth notes in the song, you should set this value to “eighth note”. Any notes or rests shorter than this value will not be shown in the score. Right-Part GuideTrack 1–16, OFF Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is effective for songs in SMF format 0 and 1 transferred from a computer. Left-Part GuideTrack 1–16, OFF Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is effective for songs in SMF format 0 and 1 transferred from a computer. Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off. EFFECT HARMONY MIDI Reference METRONOME SCORE SONG/ LESSON LESSON 88 Owner’s Manual The Functions Category DEMO LANGUAGE Function Item Range/Settings Description Demo Cancel ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/BGM] button is pressed. DEMO GROUP 1(Demo), 2(Preset), 3(User), 4(Download), 5(USB) Determines the repeat playback group. DEMO PLAY MODE 1(Normal)/ 2(Random) Determines the repeat playback mode. English/Japanese Determines the display language for the song file names, lyrics and certain display messages. All other messages and names are displayed in English. When this is set to Japanese, the file names are displayed in the Japanese font. The lyrics display follows the language setting originally made in the song data; however, when no such setting exists, the setting here is used. Language Reference * All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.) Owner’s Manual 89 Saving and Loading Data USB flash memory is a memory medium used for storing data. When a USB flash memory is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, registered settings can be saved from or loaded into the instrument. In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB flash memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them. Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on page 91. Connecting a USB Flash Memory 1 Connect a USB flash memory to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful to insert it with the proper orientation. Reference A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the display to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Messages” on page 110 for an explanation of each message. 2 Wait for confirmation that the USB flash memory has been properly mounted. Mounting (Flashing) 3 Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call up the FILE CONTROL display. You can access file operations listed below by pressing the category [r] and [f] buttons from FILE CONTROL display. Menu Reference page Format 92 User File Save 93 User Song Save 94 Load 95 USB Delete 96 User Delete 96 If you press the [FILE CONTROL] button while an unformatted USB flash memory is connected to the instrument, the “Format” function will automatically be selected. To exit from the FILE CONTROL display press the [EXIT] button. Mounted (Lit) NOTE • No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Also, in this state only buttons related to file functions will be active. NOTE • The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the following cases: • During style or song playback. • During a lesson. • While data is being loaded from a USB flash memory. 90 Owner’s Manual Saving and Loading Data Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE Using USB Storage Devices By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. NOTE • Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. • Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. Compatible USB devices • USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive) The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: http://music.yamaha.com/download/ The number of USB storage device to be used Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page 92). NOTE Connecting USB device • When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. • Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. NOTICE • The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. Reference • Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. Connecting/removing USB storage device Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save and Delete operations). NOTICE • Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. Owner’s Manual 91 Saving and Loading Data All the instructions in this chapter are related to the FILE CONTROL display. To call up the FILE CONTROL display, press the [FILE CONTROL] button. Formatting USB Flash Memory New USB flash memory must be formatted before they can be used by this instrument. NOTICE • If a USB flash memory that contains data is formatted as described below, the data will be erased. Make sure that a USB flash memory to be formatted contains no important data before carrying out the formatting procedure. Reference 1 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the Format item. The display prompts you for confirmation. 2 Press the [EXECUTE] button and the display prompts you for confirmation. You can press the [-] button at this point to cancel the operation. 3 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the format operation will begin. NOTICE • Once the format-in-progress message appears on the display the format operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 4 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. 92 Owner’s Manual Saving and Loading Data Saving User Files (Registration Memory) to USB Flash Memory 3 This operation saves a “User File” containing the registration memory data to a USB flash memory device. The User File name will have a “.usr” extension which will not appear in the instrument’s display. Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to locate the Regist Save item. A default file name will automatically be created. Cursor left The dial selects characters Press the [EXECUTE] button. The display prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the save operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the save operation will begin. User file will be saved in a folder labeled “USER FILES” which will automatically be created on the USB flash memory. To Overwrite an Existing File NOTICE • Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. NOTE • Up to 100 user files can be saved to a single USB flash memory. Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor will appear below the first character in the file name. Delete character 4 If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip ahead to step 4. 2 Cursor right Reference 1 Change the file name as necessary. • The [-] button moves the cursor to the left, and the [0] button moves it to the right. • Use the dial to select a character for the current cursor location. • The [+] button deletes the character at the cursor location. 6 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel. • The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will depend on the condition of the USB flash memory. Cursor Owner’s Manual 93 Saving and Loading Data Save a User Song to USB Flash Memory 4 This operation saves a user song (song numbers 031– 035) to USB flash memory. 1 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor will appear below the first character in the file name. Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to locate the User Song Save item. The SOURCE FILE—a user song name—will be highlighted. Cursor 5 Change the file name as necessary. Refer to “Saving User Files (Registration Memory) to USB Flash Memory” on page 93 for filename entry. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The display prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the save operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 7 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the save operation will begin. User song will be saved in a folder labeled “USER FILES” which will automatically be created on the USB flash memory. The source user song name. Reference 2 Select the source user song. You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to select the first user song. 3 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The DESTINATION SONG will be highlighted, and a default name will automatically be created. NOTICE • Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. To Overwrite an Existing File If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip ahead to step 6. The name of the file to be saved 8 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel. • The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will depend on the condition of the USB flash memory. 94 Owner’s Manual Saving and Loading Data Loading Files from a USB Flash Memory User files as well as Style, Song, and Music Database files residing on a USB flash memory can be loaded into the instrument. 5 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTICE 1 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to locate the Load item. 2 Use the dial to select the file you want to load. All user files in the USB flash memory will be displayed first, followed by the style files, song files and music database files. Files must be located in the “User Files” folder in the USB flash memory. Files located outside of that folder will not be recognized. 3 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The display prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the load operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the load operation will begin. Reference • If you load a User File registration memory data will be overwritten by the newly loaded data. Save important data to a USB flash memory before loading data that will overwrite it. NOTICE • Once the load-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. Owner’s Manual 95 Saving and Loading Data Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory Delete User Data from the Instrument This procedure deletes User, Style and Music Database files and Song files that were created on this instrument from a USB flash memory. This procedure deletes the User Song as well as Style, Song, and Music Database files transferred from an external device such as a computer. This operation does not erase the preset data. Reference 1 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to locate the USB Delete item. 2 Use the dial to select the file you want to delete. All User files in the USB flash memory will be displayed first, followed by the style files, song files and music database files. Files must be located in the “User Files” folder in the USB flash memory. Files located outside of that folder will not be recognized. 3 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The display prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the delete operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the delete operation will begin. 1 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to locate the User Delete item. Only “User Delete” can be selected if no USB flash memory is connected to the instrument. 2 Use the dial to select the file you want to delete. All user songs will be displayed first, followed by the song, style and music database files. 3 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The display prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the delete operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the delete operation will begin. NOTICE NOTICE • Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 5 96 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Owner’s Manual • Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. 5 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Connecting to a Computer This instrument can be connected to a computer to allow transfer of MIDI data or a file. Connecting a Personal Computer USB terminal USB TO HOST terminal Instrument USB cable If you want to know more about MIDI and how to use it, refer to this introductory book. MIDI Basics is available for downloading from the Yamaha Manual Library at: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ In order to be able to communicate with and use instruments connected to your computer, the appropriate driver software must be properly installed on your computer. The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software and similar applications on your computer to transmit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI devices via a USB cable. The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM. Installation of the USBMIDI driver is described on page 104. CAUTION • Connect the instrument to external equipment only after turning off power for all devices. Then, turn on the power, first to the instrument, then to the connected external equipment. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminal When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB TO HOST] terminal. • Quit any open application software on the computer. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard or play back a song, etc.) • While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. Owner’s Manual Reference MIDI Basics 97 Connecting to a Computer Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument. MIDI settings PC Mode These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception. A number of MIDI settings need to be made when you want to transfer performance data between the computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item can conveniently make multiple settings for you in one operation. Three settings are available: PC1, PC2, and OFF. This setting is not necessary when transferring song or backup files between the computer and the instrument. Range/ Settings Description Local ON/OFF Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. External Clock ON/OFF These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). Item Keyboard Out Style Out Song Out ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF OFF ON External Clock ON OFF OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out OFF OFF OFF Style Out OFF OFF OFF Keyboard Out OFF ON ON These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback. Reference Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the item you want to change its value. Use the dial to select ON or OFF. Owner’s Manual PC2* These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). 1 98 PC1 OFF Local If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this most likely may be caused by Local Control being set to off. If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will not start. 3 * Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons as many times as necessary to select the PC mode item. 3 Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF. NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument by the Song Out function, but User Songs can be. Connecting to a Computer This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup data before the actual performance data. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the Initial Send item. 3 Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument Songs, styles, or Music Database files residing on a computer or the supplied CD-ROM, can be transferred to the instrument. Backup file can also be transferred from the instrument to the computer and back. In order to transfer files between your computer and the instrument you will need to install the Musicsoft Downloader application and the USB-MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide on page 102 for installation details. Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument. Data Capacity: 1895KB 502 files total for the Song, Style and Music Database. Data Format Song: .mid SMF format 0/1 Style: .sty Music Database: .mfd Backup File: 10PG88G.bup What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)? The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. Reference Initial Send With the Musicsoft Downloader You Can.  Transfer files from the computer to the instrument’s flash memory.  refer to the procedure described on page 100. The procedure for transferring songs included on the Accessory CD-ROM from your computer to the instrument is given as an example.  Backup file can be transferred from the instrument to a computer and back.  refer to the procedure described on page 101. * Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. Owner’s Manual 99 Connecting to a Computer Use Musicsoft Downloader To Transfer Songs From the Accessory CD-ROM To the Instrument’s flash memory NOTE • If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding. 1 Install the Musicsoft Downloader and USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then connect the computer and the instrument (page 104). 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. 3 Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader shortcut icon that is created on the desktop. This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and the main window will appear. At this point you can select a Style or Music Database file on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer it to the instrument in the same way as a song file. 6 A copy of the selected MIDI song file will appear in the “List of files stored temporarily” at the top of the window. The memory medium will also be displayed at the bottom of the window to specify the destination for the transfer. Click “Instrument”, and then “Flash memory”. NOTE • The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader is running. Reference 4 Click the “Add File” button and the Add File window will appear. 5 Click the button to the right of “Look in” and select the CD-ROM drive from the drop-down menu that appears. Doubleclick the “SampleData” Folder on the window. Select the file from the “SongData” Folder you want to transfer to the instrument, and click “Open”. q Click the CD-ROM drive q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash Memory” 7 After selecting the file in the “List of files stored temporarily”, click the downward [Move] button and a confirmation message will appear. Click [OK] and the song will be transferred from the “List of files stored temporarily” to the instrument’s memory. NOTE • Files transferred to a USB flash memory root directory using the Musicsoft Downloader—any location outside the USER FILES folder on the USB flash memory device—cannot be deleted via the instrument’s file control display. Use the Musicsoft Downloader delete button to delete such files. w Double-click “SampleData” Folder  “SongData” Folder, and click a song file. 100 Owner’s Manual e Click “Open” Connecting to a Computer 8 Close the window to end the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the file transferred from your computer. 9 To playback a song stored in flash memory, press the [SONG] button. Use the dial to select the song you want to play, then press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. NOTICE • Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the memory media may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. NOTICE • Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a copy of all important data stored on your computer. To Use transferred Songs For Lessons... Transfer a Backup file from the instrument to a computer You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer “Backup” files containing Registration Memory and FUNCTION settings to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System Drive”, a file named “10PG88G.bup” will appear in the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is the backup file. For details about how to transfer backup files using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the application. NOTICE • The backup file is transmitted/received as a single file. As a result, all registration memory data will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. NOTICE • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. When using songs (only SMF format 0 and 1) transferred from a computer for lessons you can specify which channels are to be played back as the righthand and left-hand parts. Reference 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song (036–) residing in flash memory for which you want to set the guide track. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the R-Part or L-Part item. 4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. The default settings are channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. Owner’s Manual 101 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide SPECIAL NOTICES • The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation. • Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement on page 108 before installing the application.) • Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer. • Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software. • This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.). Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer. • The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your computer. • Software such as the USB-MIDI driver may be revised and updated without prior notice. Make sure to check and download the latest version of the software from the following site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ • Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately. Important Notices about the CD-ROM Data Types This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 104 for software installation instructions. CAUTION Reference • Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on equipment other than a computer. The result high-volume noise can potentially cause hearing damage or damage your equipment. Operating System (OS) The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems. 102 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide CD-ROM Contents When the included CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, the following start window will appear automatically. (If the start window does not appear automatically, open the “My computer” folder and double click “Start.exe” in the CD-ROM drive.) q w q MSD_ Musicsoft Downloader USBdrv32_ USB-MIDI Driver (for 32-bit version Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7) USBdrv64_ USB-MIDI Driver (for 64-bit version Windows XP/Vista/7) SongBook Song Book w e Application / Data Name SampleData SongData MIDI 70 songs StyleData 5 style files MDB 5 Music Database data Contents This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory. Refer to page 104 for installation instructions. This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer via USB. Refer to page 104 for installation instructions. Reference Folder Name e Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs 1–11 and 30. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in the separate Data List. These songs, styles, or data can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the instrument’s functions. In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer. Adobe Reader can be downloaded free at the Adobe website. Owner’s Manual 103 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide System Requirements Data Musicsoft Downloader USB Driver for Windows OS Computer Memory Hard Disk Display Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional/Vista * Only 32-bit is supported. Windows 7 233 MHz or higher; Intel Pentium/Celeron Processor family (500 MHz or higher is recommended) 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) 128 MB or more (at least 512 MB of free space is recommended) 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit) Windows XP Professional (SP2/SP3)/XP Home Edition (SP2/SP3)/2000 (SP4) 166 MHz or higher; Intel Core/ Pentium/Celeron processor 32 MB or more (64 MB or more is recommended) 10 MB or more — Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP2) Intel 64 compatible processor 256 MB or more 10 MB or more — Windows Vista (SP0/SP1/SP2) 800 MHz or higher; Intel Core/ Pentium/Celeron processor or Intel 64 compatible processor 512 MB or more 10 MB or more — Windows 7 1.4 GHz or higher; Intel Core/ Pentium/Celeron processor or Intel 64 compatible processor 1 GB or more (32-bit)/2 GB or more (64-bit) 10 MB or more — Software Installation If you have any problems with the installation, refer to the troubleshooting section on page 106. 2 Start the computer and use the “Administrator” account to log on to Windows. Close all applications and windows that are open. 3 Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive. 4 5 Turn off the power of the instrument. NOTE • The example displays shown in this guide are in English. Installing / Updating the USB-MIDI Driver Reference In order to be able to communicate with and use MIDI instruments connected to your computer, the appropriate driver software must be properly installed on your computer. The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software and similar applications on your computer to transmit and receive MIDI data to and from instruments via a USB cable. Connect the USB connector of the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal of the MIDI instrument with a standard USB cable. NOTE • Do not use a USB hub for connecting multiple USB devices. Computer NOTE Sequence software • If you are using several MIDI instruments with USB connection at the same time, connect all the instruments to the computer and turn on the power for all of them, then perform the following installation procedure. MIDI instrument USB Cable Driver Follow the steps below to install (or update) the USBMIDI driver. 1 104 Disconnect all USB devices from the computer except for the mouse and computer keyboard. Owner’s Manual 6 7 Turn on the power of the instrument(s). When the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears, click [Cancel]. NOTE • On some computers, it may take a few minutes before this screen appears. Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide NOTE Windows XP • This screen will not appear on Windows 7. When the message “Device driver software was not successfully installed.” appears, continue the installation procedure. NOTE • This screen will not appear if you are updating the USBMIDI driver from the previous version. Continue the installation procedure. 8 Open the following folder from the CDROM drive in your “My Computer” folder, and double click “setup.exe.” • For users of 32 bit version Windows 2000/XP/ Vista/7: “USBdrv32_” • For users of 64 bit version Windows XP/Vista/7: “USBdrv64_” Windows Vista/7 * Select [Start] menu  [Control Panel]  [System] to check the system. (Windows XP: “x64 Edition” appears on the 64 bit version, and does not appear on the 32 bit version.) When the “File Download” window appears, click [Run] or [Open]. The “Preparing to install” window appears. The next window will appear after finishing this preparation. NOTE • The messages that appear in this window may differ somewhat depending on your browser. NOTE • (Windows XP) If the “Security Warning” window appears, click [Run]. NOTE • (Windows Vista/7) If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue] or [Yes]. a message appears indicating 11 When that the driver has been successfully installed, click [Finish]. NOTE • On some computers, it may take a few minutes before this screen appears. a window appears prompting you 12 When to restart the computer, do so. Reference 9 Restart the computer by following the on-screen directions. NOTE • This display will not appear when using Windows XP x64/Vista/7. No restart is necessary. the “Welcome to the InstallShield 10 When Wizard for Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” window appears, click [Next]. If the warning message below appears during the installation, click [Yes], [Continue Anyway], or [Install]. Windows 2000 Checking the version of the driver Open the “Control Panel” and double-click the “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” icon. A window appears and the driver version is indicated in the lower left of the window. NOTE • When using Windows XP x64/Vista/7, double-click the “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver (WDM)” icon. Owner’s Manual 105 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide Installing the Musicsoft Downloader IMPORTANT • You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows 2000, XP, Vista or 7. 1 Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start window will appear automatically showing software applications. NOTE • If the start window does not appear automatically, open the “My Computer” folder and double click “Start.exe” in the CD-ROM drive. Then, proceed to step 2 below. 2 3 Click [Musicsoft Downloader]. Click the [Install] button, and follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and click “Help”. * You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft Downloader at the following web site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ IMPORTANT Reference • Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files between this instrument and a computer. No other file transfer application can be used. Troubleshooting The driver cannot be installed. • Is the USB cable connected correctly? Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the USB cable, then connect it again. • Is the USB function enabled on your computer? When you connect the instrument to the computer for the first time, if the “Add (Found) New Hardware Wizard” or the “Found New Hardware” window does not appear, the USB function on the computer may be disabled. Perform the following steps. 1 Select [Control Panel]*  [System]  [Hardware]  [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel]  [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista/7). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear at “Universal serial bus controller” or “USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x” mark, the USB controller is disabled. • Is any unknown device registered? If driver installation fails, the instrument will be marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will not be able to install the driver. Delete the “Unknown device” by following the steps below. 1 Select [Control Panel]*  [System]  [Hardware]  [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel]  [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista/7). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu “View devices by type”. 3 If you find “Other devices”, double-click it to extend the tree to look for “Unknown device”. If one appears, select it and click the [Remove] button. 4 Remove the USB cable from the instrument, and make the connection again. 5 Install the driver again. (pages 104–105) 106 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide When controlling the instrument from your computer via USB, the instrument does not operate correctly or no sound is heard. • Did you install the driver? (page 104) • Is the USB cable connected correctly? • Are the volume settings of the instrument, playback device, and application program set to the appropriate levels? • Have you selected an appropriate port in the sequence software? • Are you using the latest USB MIDI driver? The latest driver can be downloaded from the following web site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ Playback response is delayed. • Does your computer satisfy the system requirements? • Is any other application or device driver running? How can I remove the software? [Windows 2000/XP] 1 Disconnect all USB devices from the computer except for the mouse and keyboard. 2 Start the computer and log on to the Administrator account. Exit from any open applications and close all open windows. 3 From the [Start] menu, select ([Settings] ) [Control Panel]  [Add or Remove Programs] to display the Add or Remove Programs panel. 4 Click “Change or Remove Programs” located in the upper left, then select “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” or “Yamaha Musicsoft Downloader” from the list in the right panel. 5 Click [Remove]. A dialog box appears. Follow the instructions to remove the software. [Windows Vista/7] 1 Disconnect all USB devices from the com- • Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI application is running. If you are using Windows 2000, you may not be able to suspend/resume normally, depending on the particular environment (USB Host Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and connecting the USB cable will allow you to use the instrument functions again. puter except for the mouse and keyboard. 2 Start the computer and log on to the Administrator account. Reference Cannot suspend or resume the computer correctly. Exit from any open applications and close all open windows. 3 From the [Start] menu, select the [Control Panel]  [Programs and Features] or [Uninstall a program] to display the “Uninstall or change a program” window. 4 Select “Yamaha USB-MIDI Driver” or “Yamaha Musicsoft Downloader” from the list. 5 Click [Uninstall]. If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Allow] or [Continue]. A dialog box appears. Follow the instructions to remove the software. Owner’s Manual 107 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide ATTENTION SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT 5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”). BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE. You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS” and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s) and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data. The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is protected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copyrights. • You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer. • You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy of the SOFTWARE. • You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFTWARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement. YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PERMIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFTWARE. 2. RESTRICTIONS Reference • You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method whatsoever. • You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE. • You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers. • You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that violates public policy. • You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without permission by Yamaha Corporation. Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you must observe. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any commercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public without permission of the copyright owner. • The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission of the copyright owner. 7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof. • Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including, without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, misuse or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. 8. GENERAL This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or procedure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. 3. TERMINATION This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written documents and all copies thereof. 4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 108 Owner’s Manual 9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a fully authorized representative of Yamaha. Troubleshooting Appendix For the Instrument Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 98.) Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard, etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 82), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The style or song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock” on page 98. The style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 79) is set to an appropriate level. No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/ STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number 136 or a style between 148–165 (Pianist). This is not a malfunction. Style number 136 and style numbers 148–165 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 64 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. There are Japanese characters in the display messages. Make sure the Language setting in the FUNCTION display is set to English. (See page 71) The appropriate display does not appear when the [SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE], or [VOICE] button is pressed. Is another display showing? Try pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display, and then pressing one of the mentioned buttons. The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played. Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on. Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn it off. The ACMP indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any style-related function. The “OverCurrent” message is shown in the upper area of the MAIN display and the USB device does not respond. Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. Owner’s Manual Appendix Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 80). Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. 109 Messages LCD Message Appendix 110 Comment Access error! Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media or the flash memory. All Memory Clearing... Displayed while erasing all data in the flash memory. Never turn the power off during data transmission. Are you sure? Confirms whether Song Clear or Track Clear is executed or not. Backup Clearing... Displayed while clearing the back-up data in the flash memory. Cancel Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send is cancelled. Can’t clear TrackA. Displayed when a track clear error occurs. Clearing... Displayed while executing Song Clear or Track Clear of the user songs. Com Mode Displayed when the Musicsoft Downloader is started on the PC connected to the keyboard. This will not be displayed while the instrument is played back. Completed Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmission. Create Directory Displayed while creating a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader application. Data Error! Displayed when the user song contains illegal data. Delete File Displayed while deleting a file in the Musicsoft Downloader. Delete OK ? Confirms whether the Delete job is executed or not. Delete Directory Displayed while deleting a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader. Deleting... Displayed while the delete function is engaged. End Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send has been completed. Error! Displayed when writing has failed. Exit. Displayed when the record standby mode is exited because an inappropriate style has been selected during style record standby. “File information area is not large enough.” Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total number of files have become too many. File is not found. Indicates there is no file. “File too large. Loading is impossible.” Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the file data is too large. Flash Clearing... Displayed while clearing the song or style data transmitted to the internal flash memory. Format OK ? [EXECUTE] Confirms whether formatting the media is executed or not. Formatting... Displayed while formatting. Load OK ? Confirms whether loading is executed or not. Loading... Displayed while loading data. Media is not inserted. Displayed when accessing the media while it is not inserted. Media capacity is full. Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory becomes full. Memory Full Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during song recording. “MIDI receive buffer overflow.” Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to proceed. Move File Displayed while moving a file in the Musicsoft Downloader. “Now Writing... (Don’t turn off the power now, otherwise the data may be damaged.)” Displayed while writing data in the memory. Never turn the power off while writing. Doing so may result in data loss. OverCurrent Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. Overwrite ? Confirms whether overwriting is executed or not. Please Wait... Displayed when executing the jobs that take some time, such as displaying scores and lyrics, or stopping recording. Rename File Displayed while rewriting the file name in the Musicsoft Downloader. Save OK ? Confirms whether saving is executed or not. Saved data is not found. Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist. Owner’s Manual Messages LCD Message Comment Saving... Displayed while saving data in the memory. Never turn the power off while saving. Doing so may result in data loss. Send OK? Confirms whether the data transmission is executed or not. Sending... Displayed while transmitting data. “Since the media is in use now, this function is not available.” Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the media is being accessed. Style data is too large to load. Indicates that style data cannot be loaded since the style data is too large. Sure ? [YES/NO] Reconfirms whether each operation is executed or not. “The limit of the media has been reached.” Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory structure has become too complicated. The media is not formatted. Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted. “The media is write-protected.” Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-protected. Set to the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use. The notation cannot be displayed, since this song is not allowed to display the notation. This message will appear if you attempt to display the score of a song for which score display is prohibited. “The song data is too large to be converted to notation.” Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the song data is too large. There are too many files. Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files exceeds the capacity. “This function is not available now.” Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is executing another job. [nnn] “file name” Indicates the file name of the currently transmitting. “nnn” indicates the receiving block. NOTE Appendix • Not all the messages are listed in the table: the messages necessary to be explained only. Owner’s Manual 111 Specifications Keyboards MIDI • 88 Graded Hammer Standard keys (A-1–C7), with Touch Response. Display Setup • STANDBY/ON • MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX • LCD CONTRAST Realtime Control Voice • 165 Preset Styles + External files • Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/ rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL • Fingering: Multi Finger, Full Keyboard, AI Fingered • Style Volume Music Database • 305 + External files Education Feature • Dictionary • Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn Registration Memory • 8 banks x 4 types Function • • • • • • • • • • • Style Volume, Song Volume Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Pitch Bend Range, Chord Fingering MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level DUAL VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level SPLIT VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, DSP ON/OFF, DSP Type, Sustain, Master EQ Type HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume Performance assistant technology: Performance assistant technology Type PC: PC Mode Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send, MIDI: Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature Denominator, Metronome Volume, Bell SCORE: Quantize SONG/LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L) LESSON: GRADE DEMO: Demo Cancel, DEMO GROUP, DEMO PLAY MODE LANGUAGE: English/Japanese Effects Appendix • • • • Reverb: Chorus: DSP: Harmony: 35 types 44 types 238 types 26 types Song • 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM Songs (70) • Song Clear, Track Clear • Song Volume • Song Control: REPEAT & LEARN, A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF, START/STOP Performance assistant technology • Chord, Chord/Free, Melody, Chord/Melody Recording • Song User Song: 5 Songs Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE 112 Owner’s Manual Amplifier • 6W + 6W Speakers Power Supply Users within U.S or Europe: PA-150 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Others: PA-5D, PA-150 or an equivalent Dimensions (W x D x H) • 1,397 x 445 x 146 mm (55" x 17-1/2" x 5-3/4") with keyboard stand: 1,399 x 445 x 761 mm (55-1/16" x 17-1/2" x 29-15/16") Weight • 20.7kg (45 lbs. 10 oz.) with keyboard stand: 27.7kg (61 lbs. 1 oz.) Supplied Accessories • • • • • • • Data List Music Rest Accessory CD-ROM Keyboard Stand Owner’s Manual Footswitch My Yamaha Product User Registration * The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. • AC Power adaptor (PA-150 or an equivalent) • VOLUME: • OVERALL: • • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE, SUSTAIN, PEDAL UNIT • Adaptor: 142 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 381 XGlite voices Polyphony: 64 DUAL SPLIT Style • • External Clock • Song Out • 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2 • Pitch Bend Wheel • • Initial Send • Style Out Auxiliary jacks • 320 x 240 dots LCD display (backlit) • • • • • Local On/Off • Keyboard Out * May not be included depending on your particular area. Optional Accessories • AC Power Adaptor: Users within U.S or Europe: PA-150 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Others: PA-5D, PA-150 or an equivalent • Headphones: HPE-150 • Pedal Unit: LP-7A • Footswitch: FC4/5 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Index A E M A-B Repeat ................................ 84 Accessories ................................. 7 ACMP ........................................ 25 AI Fingered ................... 27, 81, 87 Auto Accompaniment Range .. 25 Auto-Accompaniment ........ 25, 76 Easy Chords ...............................27 Easy Song Arranger ..................54 Effect ..........................................65 Ending ........................................76 External Clock ...........................98 Main (Section) .......................... 76 MAIN Display .......................... 36 Main Voice ................................ 18 Master EQ Type ........................ 69 Measure ..................................... 37 Melody ................................. 32, 43 Melody score ............................. 32 Melody type (performance assistant technology) ................ 48 Melody Voice ...................... 55, 84 Messages ................................. 110 Metronome .................... 22, 70–71 MIDI .......................................... 98 Multi Finger ........................ 81, 87 Music Database ......................... 53 Music Rest ................................... 7 Mute ........................................... 84 Backup ............................... 64, 101 Bell ............................................. 70 C Channel ................................... 101 Chord ....................... 26–27, 43, 82 Chord Dictionary ...................... 82 Chord Fingering ............ 27, 81, 87 Chord type (performance assistant technology) ................ 44 Chord/Free type (performance assistant technology) ................ 46 Chord/Melody type (performance assistant technology) ................ 50 Chorus ....................................... 66 Chorus Level ............................. 72 Computer ................................... 97 D Default Setting .......................... 86 Delete (Songs transferred from a computer) ............................... 64 Delete (USB flash memory) .... 96 Delete (User Data) .................... 96 Delete (User Song) ................... 60 Demo ......................................... 31 Demo Cancel ............................ 89 Demo Group ............................. 85 Demo Play Mode ...................... 85 Display ................................ 36–37 Double-Staff Score ................... 32 Drum Kit ................................... 19 DSP ............................................ 67 Dual Voice ........................... 20, 73 F Fast-Forward (FF) .....................31 File Control ................................90 File Name ..................................93 Fill .............................................. 76 Flash Memory ................... 29, 100 Footswitch .................................13 Format (File Control) ................92 FullKeyboard .......................81, 87 Function ..................................... 86 Function Display .......................36 G Grade ..........................................42 H Harmony ....................................65 Harmony Volume ......................88 Headphones ...............................13 I Initial Send .................................99 Initialization ...............................64 Intro ............................................76 K Keyboard Out ............................ 98 Keyboard Stand Assembly .......10 L Language ...................................71 Lesson ........................................38 Load ...........................................95 Local ...........................................98 L-Part .......................................101 Lyric ...........................................33 N notation ...................................... 32 O Octave ........................................ 72 One Touch Setting .................... 70 P P.A.T. Type ................................ 43 Pan ............................................. 72 Panel Sustain ............................. 68 Part (Right, Left) ....................... 38 PC Mode .................................... 98 Pedal Unit .................................. 14 performance assistant technology ................................. 43 Pitch Bend ................................. 68 Pitch Bend Range ..................... 87 Power Adaptor .......................... 13 Preset Song ................................ 28 Appendix B Q Quantize .................................... 88 Owner’s Manual 113 Index R U Recording .................................. 56 Registration Memory ............... 62 Repeat .................................. 42, 84 Reverb ........................................ 66 Reverb Level ............................. 72 Rewind (REW) ......................... 31 R-Part ....................................... 101 USB TO DEVICE ...............30, 90 USB TO HOST .........................97 USB-MIDI Driver ........... 103–105 User file ......................................93 User File Save ...........................93 User Song ..................................56 V S Save (User File) ........................ 93 Save (User Song) ...................... 94 Score .......................................... 32 Section ....................................... 76 Single-Staff Score ..................... 32 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ...... 99 Song ..................................... 28, 83 Song Clear ................................. 60 Song Out ................................... 98 Split Point ............................ 21, 80 Split Voice ........................... 21, 73 Style ..................................... 24, 76 Style File ................................... 24 Style Out ................................... 98 Sustain (Footswitch) ................. 13 Sustain (Panel) .......................... 68 Synchro Start ...................... 25, 77 Synchro Stop ............................. 78 T Appendix Tempo (Metronome) ................ 22 Tempo (Song) ........................... 83 Tempo (Style) ........................... 79 Time Signature (Denominator, Numerator) ................................ 23 Touch Response ........................ 75 Touch Sensitivity ...................... 75 Track .......................................... 57 Track Clear ................................ 61 Transfer ............................... 98–99 Transpose .................................. 74 Troubleshooting .............. 106, 109 Tuning ........................................ 74 114 Owner’s Manual Voice .....................................18, 72 Volume (Dual Voice) ................72 Volume (Main Voice) ................72 Volume (master) ........................15 Volume (Song) ...........................83 Volume (Split Voice) ................. 72 Volume (Style) ...........................79 X XF ...........................................6, 33 XGlite ...........................................6 LIMITED 3-YEAR WARRANTY ON DIGITAL PIANOS (DGX SERIES) Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/ noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA. ©2009 Yamaha Corporation of America. Effective: 11/01/09 Owner’s Manual 115 116 Owner’s Manual Owner’s Manual 117 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 ITALY CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA SPAIN/PORTUGAL MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia Tel: 495 626 0660 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. 5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-466-5551 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE EKB50 Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2010 Yamaha Corporation WT98820 XXXPOXXX.X-01A0 Printed in China